Sie sind auf Seite 1von 1426

en

Service Manual
(20
Crawler Dozers
ints)

PR 712 - 752

(10
1 General Information

2 Special Tools, Application Guidelines

3 Technical Data - Maintenance Guidelines

Service Manual 4 Engine


Property of Liebherr-Werk Telfs GmbH I
5 Coupling and Splitter Box

Crawler Dozers
6 Travel Hydraulic
SERIES

7 Working Hydraulic
Table of Contents
8 Hydraulic Components
Issue 01/2004

II 9 Electrical System

10 Electronic Control

11 Travel Gear

12 Track Components

13 Attachments - front

14 Attachments - rear
III
15 Main Frame - Add On Components

16 Tank Installation's

Book No.: 17 Operators Platform, Heater, Air Conditioner

Name of Manual Owner: 18 Special Attachments

19 Miscellaneous Informations
Sub Group Index
Foreword and explanation 1.1

Safety guidelines 1.2.01


Hand signals 1.2.02

Service items 1.3.01

Table - charts 1.4


Conversion table 1.4.01

Tightening torques standard screws 1.4.02

Tightening torques SAE screws 1.4.03

Hole diameter before tapping 1.4.04

Couplings 1.4.05

ISO - tolerances 1.4.06

Code letters + terminal designations electric 1.5

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 01 General information Blatt


Page 1.0.00.01
Feuille
For your information
This manual contains technical data, descriptions of design and function, repair and adjustment guidelines as well
as numerous drawings, functional views and illustrations
LIEBHERR - crawler dozers (PR), crawler loaders (LR) or pipelayers (RL).
This manual should simplify competent customer service of our products, does however, not replace expert and
qualified training and an attendance of our factory schools.
Information which is in trade considered basic knowledge is not included. Operation and spare parts information can
be found in separate manuals.
The manual will be updated as necessary when changes occur in series.
This symbol is used in the manual for very important notes.
During the activities on the machine, accident prevention regulations and safety guidelines must be strictly
observed.
This manual is intended for the exclusive use of the registered owner and may not be reproduced complete or in
part or passed on a third person without written permission.
This manual is still on property of LIEBHERR-Werk Telfs GmbH.
All rights reserved - Printed in Austria.
We reserve the right to make changes of technical details on the machine in comparison to the information and
drawings in this manual.

Printed and published by


LIEBHERR-Werk Telfs GmbH., Service -Training Department.

Explanation of structure (page numbers)


In order to find specific information and add supplements more easily, the following numbering system is being
used:

main group sub group model group page No.

6. 3. 10 01

main group according sub group of main group division based on continuous running
to manual index according to sub group information content or number within the model
index machine model group group, illustrations or
parts list with .00 may be
added at the beginning or
end of each group.

Updated pages retain the same page number, but receive a more recent date when mailed. Supplements have a
new number. If the page is only valid for a certain machine model group, it will so be indicated on the page.
We hope that with the enclosed information we have taken yet another step to improve the service on the
LIEBHERR - crawler dozers, crawler loaders and pipelayers.

LIEBHERR-Werk Telfs GmbH.


Service-Training Dept.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Foreword and explanation LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 03 General Information Blatt


Page
Feuille 1.1.00.01
Service Items
Notes for the disposition of service fluids and filter:
- Service fluids may not be discharged into the ground, drainage system or waterways.
- Different service fluids and filters should be collected and disposed of in separate containers.
- Do not use containers, which previously held food items or drinks - to prevent danger of mix-ups.
- Dispose of these items in an environmentally friendly manner according to applicable guidelines and
regulations. Observe all state, local and national regulations.
- Do not use old or incorrectly stored service fluids and filters, dispose of them properly.

1. Service fluids for Diesel engines with turbo chargers

1.1. Engine lube oil


Engine lube oils must meet a certain quality and a certain viscosity, depending on their use and ambient
temperatures. Problem-free operation can only be ensured only if the requirements for both areas are met.

1.1.1 Oil quality


To meet the technical demands, only highly alloyed lube oils are used in modern Diesel engines. They
consists of high-quality base oils, mixed with additives. These additives provide the required properties for
these oils.
For LIEBHERR Diesel engines with turbo chargers, oils of the following specifications are approved, the higher
quality oils are preferred:
API - classification : CF-4, CG-4, CH-4, CI-4,
(American Petroleum Institute)

ACEA (CCMC) - classification : E2 (D4), E3 (D5), E4, E5


(Association des Constructeurs Europens de lAutomobile)

Note: For older machines / Diesel engines, if still in use, engine oils according to the lower specification as
noted in the original operation manuals may be used. However, we recommend the use of these new
oils, since the service life of the engine can be extended significantly by using these higher quality
oils. The originally noted oil and filter change intervals may be extended.

1.1.2 Oil viscosity


Z In addition to the quality, the oil must also provide a certain viscosity the selection is made according to the
SAE - classification (Society of Automotive Engineers).
The determining factor for the correct selection of the SAE classification is the ambient temperature. In most
regions, SAE 10W-40 is recommended (see chart below).
If the viscosity is too high, starting problems can occur, if it is too low, the lubrication efficiency can be
endangered, both factors can lead to increased engine wear.
The temperature ranges shown in the following chart are guidelines and may be exceeded or fallen below for a
short time.

For the operation in extreme climate zones, such as in arctic regions, special guidelines apply and are
available from the manufacturer.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Service Items Blatt


Page
Feuille 01.3.01.01
1.1.3 Oil change intervals
The oil change intervals noted in the Maintenance and Inspection schedules always apply to "normal operating
conditions". They apply for normal, central European temperatures, annual operation of approx. 1000
operating hours, use of oils of the required minimum quality and fuels with a sulfur content of less than 0.5%.
When using higher quality oils, the operating hours per interval may be doubled - see the following chart.
However, the 500 hour interval may not be exceeded.
Engine oil and filters must be changed at least once a year, even if the given change interval has not yet been
reached.
In difficult circumstances, such as repeated cold start, higher sulfur content (above 05.%) in the fuel, more
severe climatic conditions (for example continuous temperatures below -10C) etc., the intervals must be cut in
half. This means, for each difficulty, the permitted operating hours per interval must be multiplied by a factor of
0.5.
Permissible oil change intervals in operating hours:

Oil quality:
Oil quality:
Applications
CF-4, CG-4, CH-4,
E3 (D5), E4, E5,
CI-4, E2 (D4))
Ambient Sulfur content
Change interval Change interval
temperature in fuel

above -10C to 0,5% 250 hrs. 500 hrs.


(Normal
temperature) above 0,5% 125 hrs. 250 hrs.

below -10C to 0,5% 125 hrs. 250 hrs.


Continuous
temperature above 0,5% 60 hrs. 125 hrs.

1.2. Diesel fuels


Diesel fuels must meet the minimum requirements of the following specifications.
The sulfur content may not exceed 0.5%. A higher sulfur content has negative effects on oil change intervals
and engine service life. A higher sulfur content above 1% is not permitted.
Fuels with low sulfur content (for example, according to European regulations <0.05 %) must contain additives
to retain the lubrication efficiency according to HFRR(60)-Test <400m - . Insufficient lubrication causes
premature wear of the injection system components, especially distributor injection pumps. The additives should
be added by the fuel supplier, as he is responsible for the quality of the fuel. We do not recommend addition of
secondary lubrication additives by the user.

Approved fuel specifications:


DIN EN 590 + HFRR(60)-Test <400m
ASTM D 975 - 89a 1D and 2D + HFRR(60)-Test <400m + cetane rating >45 (recommendation: >50)
Diesel fuels in very low temperatures
At ambient temperatures below freezing (0 C), the flow properties of warm temperature Diesel fuel can become
insufficient due to paraffin excretion. The same applies to cold temperature Diesel fuels in temperatures below.
-15 C.
In order to prevent operating problems in even lower temperatures, Diesel fuel with an additive is sometimes
available, for use in temperatures to -20 C.
In order to prevent operating problems in even lower temperatures, mix Diesel fuel with normal gasoline or
petroleum. Addition of normal gasoline is a makeshift measure and may not exceed 30% per volume. Do not
use Super gasoline for mixing.
Mixing fuel can diminish engine performance, for that reason, keep the added fuel as low as possible,
depending on the ambient temperatures.
For safety reasons, mix fuel only in the fuel tank. When refueling, add the lighter additive before the Diesel fuel.
Then let the engine run for a short time until the mixture has been distributed throughout the fuel system.
Diesel fuels - Mixing ratio ( Vol.-%)
Ambient Winter Diesel fuel Winter Diesel fuel
Summer Diesel fuel
temperature to -15C to -20C
C % Fuel % Additive % Fuel % Additive % Fuel % Additive
0 to -10 70 30 100 -- 100 --
-10 to -15 50 50* 100 -- 100 --
-15 to -20 -- -- 70 30 100 --
-20 to -25 -- -- 50 50* 70 30
* = If an addition of more than 50% is required, use only petroleum (no regular gasoline). The Diesel fuel part
may never be more than 50% .

Additives to Diesel fuel (flow improvers)


Commercially available flow improvers can also improve Diesel fuel properties in cold temperatures. Always
read and observe the manufacturers user guidelines and quantities.

1.3. Coolant
Coolants, containing unsuitable anti corrosion / antifreeze fluids or wrong mixed coolants could damage the
engine or its parts, caused by cavitation or corrosion. Additionally heat isolating deposits could be created on
heat transferring parts, which overheat and lead to the damage of the engine.
For a long term, fault free operation, the coolant must be filled year round with a mixture of at least 50%
anticorrosion/antifreeze fluid. This concentration protects the system to approx. -37C / -34F.

Antifreeze protection chart

Protection to

Percentage of antifreeze (%)

Note: Do not use more than 60% anti-corrosion / antifreeze fluids, a higher percentage would actually
reduce the cooling and antifreeze protection and causes gel formation in the coolant fluid. Danger of
engine damage!

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Service Items Blatt


Page
Feuille 01.3.01.02
Coolant filters are used on some engine series, which filter the coolant in the auxiliary flow and in addition, a
chemical additive in the filter (DCA 4) reinforces the protection against cavitation, corrosion, scale deposits and
foam formation. The DCA4 concentration must be between 0.3 and 0.8 units per liter of coolant. See the
following chapter Coolant with DCA4. This results in a mixing ration of approx. 48.5 % water, 48.5 % anti
corrosion /antifreeze fluid and 3 % DCA4.
Check the mixing ratio regularly during maintenance work. See instructions in section 3.4.
If coolant must be replaced, make sure that the given mixing ratios are retained. Do not fall below this ratios nor
exceed it.
Due to the natural aging process of the coolant, it must be replaced at least once every 2 years. Use only
suitable coolant, free of contaminants. Clean contaminated cooling systems. Note the following regulations.
To replace or add coolant in larger quantities, mix the given parts outside the cooling circuit in a suitable, clean
container first.

Fresh water guidelines:


To mix coolant fluid, use clean, clear water, which is not too hard. Often, but not always, regular tap water may
be used.
Seawater, brine, brackish water, or industrial waste water is not suitable.
Approved fresh water quality (as of 2001) for use with anti corrosion / antifreeze fluid -
- without DCA4 - with DCA4
Sum of alkaline earths (water hardness): : 0,6 to 3,6 mmol/l 0,6 to 2,7 mmol/l
(3 to 20d) (3 to 15d)
Ph - value at 20 C : 6,5 to 8,5 6,5 to 8,0
Chloride / ion content : max. 80 mg/l max. 80 mg/l
Sulfate / ion content : max. 100 mg/l max. 80 mg/l

Presently approved anti corrosion / antifreeze fluids (as of December 2003):


Brand name Manufacturer
Agip Antifreeze Plus Agip Petroli S.p.A, Rom / Italien
Agip Langzeit-Frostschutz Autol-Werke GmbH., Wrzburg / BRD
Antigel DB 486 Sotragal SA, St. Priest / Frankreich
Aral Khler-Frostschutz A Aral AG, Bochum / BRD
AVIA Frostschutz APN (G48-00) Deutsche AVIA-Minerall GmbH, Mnchen / BRD

BP Antifrost X 2270 A Deutsche BP AG, Hamburg / BRD


BP Napgel C 2270/1 BP Chemicals Ltd., London / England

Caltex Engine Coolant DB Caltex (UK) ltd., London / England


Caltex Extended Life Coolant Caltex
Castrol Anti-Freeze O Deutsche Castrol Vertriebs-GmbH, Hamburg /BRD
Century F.L. Antifreeze Century Oils, Hanley, Stoke-on-Trent / England
Chevron DEX-COOL Extended Life Anti-Freeze/Coolant Chevron Texaco

Deutz Khlschutzmittel 0101 1490 DEUTZ Service International GmbH, Kln / BRD

Esso Khlerfrostschutz Esso AG, Hamburg / BRD

Fricofin Fuchs Mineraloelwerke GmbH, Mannheim / BRD


Frostschutz Motorex (G48-00) Bucher+Cie, Langenthal / Schweiz
Frostschutz 500 Mobil Oil AG, Hamburg / BRD

Glacelf Auto Supra Total


Glycoshell AF 405 Shell
Glycoshell N Shell
Glysantin (G 48-00) BASF AG, Ludwigshafen / BRD

Havoline XLC ARTECO


Havoline DEX-COOL Extended Life Anti-Freece/Coolant Chevron Texaco
Igol Antigel Type DB Igol France, Paris / Frankreich

Labo FP 100 Labo Industrie, Nanterre / Frankreich

Motul Anti-freeze Motul SA, Aubervilliers Cedex / Frankreich

OMV-Khlerfrostschutzmittel OMV AG, Schwechat / sterreich


Organifreeze Total
OZO Frostschutz S Total Deutschland GmbH, Dsseldorf / BRD

Total Antigel S-MB 486 Total Deutschland GmbH, Dsseldorf / BRD


Total Frostfrei Total Deutschland GmbH, Dsseldorf / BRD

Veedol Antifreeze O Deutsche Veedol GmbH, Hamburg / BRD

Wintershall Khlerschutz Wintershall Minerall GmbH, Dsseldorf / BRD

Presently approved anti corrosion / antifreeze fluids / 50:50 Premix (as of December 2003):
(50 % water : 50 % corrosion/antifreeze fluids)

Brand name Manufacturer


Liebherr Anti-Freeze APN mix Id.Nr. 8611 045 - 20 l bundle LIEBHERR
Caltex Extended Life Coolant Pre-Mixed 50/50 (ready-to-use-version) Caltex
Chevron DEX-COOL Extended Life Prediluted 50/50 Antifreeze coolant Chevron Texaco
Havoline XLC, 50/50 ARTECO
Havoline DEX-COOL Extended Prediluted 50/50 Antifreece coolant Chevron Texaco
Organicool 50/50 Total

Presently approved anti corrosion / antifreeze fluids with DCA4 - ready to use (as of December 2003):
Brand name Manufacturer
Liebherr Anti-Freeze "pret a l'emploi" Id.Nr. 10 005 347 - 20 l bundle LIEBHERR

The given anti corrosion / antifreeze fluids are approved for all Liebherr Diesel engines (with and without coolant
filter / DCA4).

1.3.1 Coolant with DCA4 (DCA = Diesel Coolant Additive)


The additive DCA4 is "used up" during use. The DCA4 concentration in the filter compensates for this loss
accordingly, if there is no loss of coolant and the correct filter is used at the given change interval.
The DCA4 concentration must be between 0.3 and 0.8 units per liter of coolant. To check, refer to the
"Maintenance and inspection guidelines", section 3.4.
For change intervals for filter and coolant, see Maintenance and inspection schedule , section 3.2.
If the cooling system is filled initially or refilled after repairs, then DCA 4 in liquid form must be added to the
50% anticorrosion / antifreeze and 50% water mixture. The mixture should be mixed outside the cooling
system. Note the safety guidelines issued by the additive manufacturer.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Service Items Blatt


Page
Feuille 01.3.01.03
This results in a coolant mixture ration of approx. 48.5 % water, 48.5 % anticorrosion / antifreeze fluid and 3%
DCA4.
In addition, use a new coolant filter, according to the filling quantity. The correct Id. No. of the filter can be
found in the Parts Manual or the Operation and Maintenance manual of the machine.
Overview chart DCA4 and filter requirements (as of 2001)
Coolant system contents Required quantity of liquid DCA 4 DCA 4 - water filter
Liter Container approx.0.5 liter appr. liter Id. No.
24-39 3 oder 1,5 7367 045
40-59 4 oder 2,0 7381 493
60-79 5 oder 2,5 7367 052
80-115 8 oder 4 7367 052
Container liquid DCA4 at approx. 0.5 l -Id. No. 7363 898
Liebherr coolant (ready to use, 20 liter, above mixing ratio) - Id. No. 10 005 347

1.3.2 Coolant - special filling - with anti corrosion fluids, without antifreeze fluids
In exceptional cases and if ambient temperatures are constantly above the freezing point, for example in
tropical regional, where no anticorrosion / antifreeze fluids is proofed available, fresh water and water-soluble
anticorrosion fluids (Inhibitors) may be used as coolant.
Do not use coolant refiners (anticorrosion oils) with emulsifying capacity. If necessary, flush the cooling system
before refilling.
The fresh water quality must meet use with DCA4 - see chart Approved fresh water quality.
The coolant must be changed once a year.

Use of DCA4
To provide sufficient protection against corrosion, approximately twice the amount of DCA4 must be used as
compared to the above mixing ration, when using anticorrosion / antifreeze fluids and DCA4 - see above
"overview chart and filter requirements".
The DCA4 concentration must be between 0.6 and 1.06 units. It must be checked during maintenance work or
when the coolant filter is changed, and corrected, as necessary.
This results in a mixing ratio of
max. 94 % fresh water and
min. 6 % DCA4 additive

Use of products from Caltex / Chevron Texaco / Havoline / Total


To provide sufficient protection against corrosion with these products, a mixture of 92,5 vol.% coolant and 7,5
vol.% anti corrosion fluid must be kept.
The mixture ratio must be checked during maintenance work and corrected, as necessary. The concentration
of the anti corrosion fluid must not fall below 5 vol.% nor exceed 10 vol.%.

Presently approved anti corrosion fluids (as of December 2003):


Brand name Manufacturer
DCA4 Diesel Coolant Additives Fleetguard
Caltex CL Corrosion Inhibitor Concentrate Caltex
Chevron Texaco Heavy Duty Extended Life Corrosion Inhibitor Nitrite Free Chevron Texaco
Havoline Extended Life Corrosion Inhibitor (XLI) ARTECO
Total WT Supra Total
2. Oil for hydraulic system
In the hydraulic system, use only Diesel engine lube oils or special approved oils.

2.1. Oil quality

2.1.1 Approved engine oil classifications


API - classification : CF-4, CG-4, CH-4, CI-4,
(American Petroleum Institute)
ACEA (CCMC) - classification : E2 (D4), E3 (D5), E4, E5,
(Association des Constructeurs Europens de lAutomobile)
Note: The API classifications CC, CD, CE and CF are now obsolete, however, in quality, they had been
approved for use in the hydraulic system.

2.1.2 Special oils


Approval is given for each machine type separately. Special guidelines are issued with the release.
The following product presently considered to be an environmentally friendly hydraulic fluid:
Panolin - HLP Synth - VG 46

2.2. Oil viscosity


In addition to the quality, the oil must also provide a certain viscosity, the selection is made according to the
SAE classification (Society of Automotive Engineers).
The determining factor for the correct selection of SAE classification is the ambient temperature, single grade
oils are preferred.
If the viscosity is too high, it can cause cavitations, if it is too low, the lubrication efficiency may be endangered.
Both can cause failure of hydraulic components.
The temperature ranges shown in the following chart are guidelines. When operating the machine within the
black temperature range, the following warm up procedure should be carried out.

Single grade oils

Multi grade oils

Viscosity for environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids according to ISO: VG 46


(covers SAE 10W and SAE 20W-20 or SAE 10W-30)
For operation in extreme climate zones, such as arctic regions, special guidelines are available from the
manufacturer.
Warm up procedure:
a) In temperatures up to 10 C below the given limit (black range)
After starting, run the Diesel engine at medium speed. Warm up the hydraulic system by carefully actuating
the hydraulic cylinders. Extend and retract the hydraulic cylinders fully for short periods. After 5 minutes,
carefully engage the travel hydraulic as well. Total warm up period is approximately 10 minutes.
b) At even lower temperatures:
Before starting the Diesel engine, preheat the oil in the hydraulic tank, then proceed as described in paragraph
a).

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Service Items Blatt


Page
Feuille 01.3.01.04
3. Gear oil
The lube oil specification for gears is based on API and SAE classification. The oil chamber in travel gears for
double lifetime seal is filled with oil from the hydraulic system - see section 2.
3.1. Oil quality
As a general rule, only oils meeting API - classification GL-5 may be used.
3.2. Oil viscosity
The following oils must be used in travel gears, and are highly recommended for use in splitter boxes:
Viscosity classification SAE 85 W - 140 EP
For splitter boxes, oils of Viscosity classification SAE 90 EP or SAE 80 W - 90 EP may also be used.
For the operation in extreme climatic conditions, such as in arctic regions or in extreme temperatures ranges, such
as in slag applications, special oils may be approved if the prevailing ambient temperatures are known operations.

3.3. Lube oil for final drive - sealing chamber


For oil quality and viscosity see section 2, Oil for hydraulic system, but do not use special oils.

4. Lube oil for support shaft bearing


For oil quality and viscosity see section 2, Oil for hydraulic system, but do not use special oils.

5. Hoist gear oil - pipe layers


As a general rule, the guidelines noted in the Operation and Maintenance manual and the winch manufacturer
should be observed.
For lubrication technical reasons, we recommend the use of Diesel lube oil, which meets at least one of the
following quality and viscosity classifications.
5.1. Oil quality
according to API - classification : CF, CF-4, CG-4, CH-4, CI-4,
ACEA (CCMC) - classification : E2 (D4), E3 (D5), E4, E5,
5.2. Oil viscosity
according to SAE - classification : 10W
ISO - classification : VG 32

6. Grease

6.1. General lubrication points and track tensioner


The grease must meet specification KP 2 k - consistency 2 according to NL GI - class and DIN 51818 and DIN
51825 or EP 2 according to NF-T-60 132 .
The grease must also be lithium based, with a VKA value of at least 2300 N according to DIN 51350 or ASTM D
2596.
6.2. Long term grease / grease to protect against corrosion
For the lifetime lubrication of bearing points of lift cylinder suspensions and to protect against corrosion at the
initial installation of dry bearing points, to protect exposed piston rods, to prevent rust formation, etc., a special
calcic, acid free grease should be used.
We recommend LIEBHERR's special paste CTK - Id. No. 8613 313 01
For general conservation - see section 19, Conservation guidelines - other acid free anticorrosion grease may
be used.

7. Miscellaneous
Always observe all guidelines issued in the Operation and Maintenance manuals, repair manuals and on
drawings.

7.1. Rubber seals on doors and covers


Use silicon spray or Talcum powder.

7.2. Hydraulic cylinder installation


Lubricant for threads of pistons, piston nuts and piston rod bearings -
Liebherr High performance lubricant Id. No. 8300 004
Special protection against corrosion for installation of sealing elements -
Liebherr Special anticorrosion grease Id. No. 8300 005
To obtain To
Unit of Measure Multiply by by
Multiply obtain
Length mm 0,039 inch 25,4 mm
m 3,281 feet 0,305 m
m 1,093 yard 0,914 m
km 0,621 mile 1,609 km

Area cm 0,155 sq. inch 6,452 cm


m 10,764 sq. feet 0,093 m
m 1,196 sq. yard 0,0863 m
km 0,386 sq. mile 2,59 km

Volume cm 0,061 cu. inch 16,387 cm


m 35,314 cu. feet 0,028 m
m 1,308 cu. yard 0,764 m
l 61,025 cu. inch 0,016 l
l 0,035 cu. feet 28,316 l
l 0,264 gallon 3,785 l
l 1,057 quart 0,946 l

Weight g 0,035 oz. 28,349 g


kg 2,204 lbs. 0,453 kg
t 1,102 short t 0,907 t

Force N 0,225 lbs. 4,449 N


kN 224,732 lbs. 0,0044 kN

Torque Nm 0,737 ft. lbs. 1,356 Nm


Power kW 1,342 HP 0,745 kW
PS 0,736 kW 1,358 PS
PS 0,986 HP 1,014 PS

Pressure bar 14,5 PSI 0,069 bar


(hydraulic) kpa 0,145 PSI 6,896 kpa

Ground pressure kg/cm 14,223 lbs. sq. inch 0,0703 kg/cm


kg/m 0,205 lbs. sq. ft. 4,878 kg/m

Compression g/cm 0,036 lbs. cu. inch 27,78 g/cm


kg/m 0,062 lbs. cu. ft. 16,13 kg/m

Speed km/h 0,621 mph 1,609 km/h


m/min 3,281 ft. / min 0,305 m/min

Temperature C (Cx1,8) + 32 F (F-32)/1,8 C


C C+273 K K-273 C

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 01 Conversion table Blatt


Page 1.4.01.01
Feuille
The preload and tightening torques listed in the chart are from VDI guidelines 2230 of July 1986.
Installation preload FM and tightening torques MA for shaft screws with metric standard or fine thread per DIN ISO
262 and DIN ISO 965 T2 (replacement for DIN 13 part 13) and screw head dimension of hex head screws with shaft
DIN EN 24014 (replacement for DIN 931 part 1) or socket head screws DIN EN ISO 4762 (replacement for DIN
912).
The chart values are valid for lubricated screws, surface black treated, phosphated or galvanic zinc plated and for
dry screws, surface according to flZn - LH-Norm 10021432 (replaces DACROMET 500)

Medium friction G = 0,12.


Always observe the tightening torques and/ or procedures listed in drawings / parts lists, instructions of
component descriptions, if noted, they override the factory standards listed in the torque charts.
Never use a standard lock washer with 10.9 or 12.9 screws. If a washer is necessary, use only "heavy duty"
washers, made from hardened material.
Always use torque wrenches with the correct range - the upper third of the range should include the listed torque
value according to the chart.
When using impact screws, make sure that the given tightening torque is observed - should be checked before and
during the tightening procedure with torque wrench (Nm x 0,7375 = ft.lbs.)!

Preload forces and tightening torques for screws with standard metric thread according
to factory standard WN 4037 I

Wrench size
Preload values FM based on Tightening torques MA are (x) = per DIN931, for
screw grades and are given based on screw grades and
Standard Hex head
in N are given in Nm Socket head
metric thread
screws screws

8.8 10.9 12.9 8.8 10.9 12.9 mm Inch mm Inch


M 4 x 0,7 4 050 6 000 7 000 2,8 4,1 4,8 7 9/32 3 --

M 5 x 0,8 6 600 9 700 11 400 5,5 8,1 9,5 8 5/16 4 5/32

M 6 x1 9 400 13 700 16 100 9,5 14,0 16,5 10 -- 5 --

M 7 x1 13 700 20 100 23 500 15,5 23,0 27,0 11 -- -- --

M 8 x 1,25 17 200 25 000 29 500 23 34 40 13 1/2 6 --

M 10 x 1,5 27 500 40 000 47 000 46 68 79 (17) 16 (11/16) -- 8 5/16

M 12 x 1,75 40 000 59 000 69 000 79 117 135 (19) 18 (3/4) -- 10 --

M 14 x 2 55 000 80 000 94 000 125 185 215 (22) 21 (7/8) -- 12 --

M 16 x 2 75 000 111 000 130 000 195 280 330 24 -- 14 9/16

M 18 x 2,5 94 000 135 000 157 000 280 390 460 27 1-1/16 14 9/16

M 20 x 2,5 121 000 173 000 202 000 390 560 650 30 1-3/16 17 --

M 22 x 2,5 152 000 216 000 250 000 530 750 880 (32) 34 -- 17 --

M 24 x 3 175 000 249 000 290 000 670 960 1120 36 1-7/16 19 3/4

M 27 x 3 230 000 330 000 385 000 1000 1400 1650 41 1-5/8 19 3/4

M 30 x 3,5 280 000 400 000 465 000 1350 1900 2250 46 1-13/16 22 7/8

M 33 x 3,5 350 000 495 000 580 000 1850 2600 3000 50 2 24 --

M 36 x 4 410 000 580 000 680 000 2350 3300 3900 55 2-3/16 27 1-1/16

M 39 x 4 490 000 700 000 820 000 3000 4300 5100 60 2-3/8 27 1-1/16

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Standard screws LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Tightening Torques Blatt
01 04 Factory standard WN 4037 I Page
Feuille
1.4.02.01
Preload forces and tightening torques for screws with fine metric thread according to
factory standard WN 4037 I

Wrench size
Preload values FM based on Tightening torques MA are (x) = per DIN931, for
screw grades and are given based on screw grades and
Fine metric
in N are given in Nm Socket head
thread
Hex head screws screws

8.8 10.9 12.9 8.8 10.9 12.9 mm Inch mm Inch


M 8 x1 18 800 27 500 32 500 24,5 36 43 13 1/2 6 --

M 9 x1 24 800 36 500 42 500 36 53 62 -- -- -- --

M 10 x 1 31 500 46 500 54 000 52 76 89 17 11/16 8 5/16

M 10 x 1,25 29 500 43 000 51 000 49 72 84 17 11/16 8 5/16

M 12 x 1,25 45 000 66 000 77 000 87 125 150 19 3/4 10 --

M 12 x 1,5 42 500 62 000 73 000 83 122 145 19 3/4 10 --

M 14 x 1,5 61 000 89 000 104 000 135 200 235 22 7/8 12 --

M 16 x 1,5 82 000 121 000 141 000 205 300 360 24 -- 14 9/16

M 18 x 1,5 110 000 157 000 184 000 310 440 520 27 1-1/16 14 9/16

M 18 x 2 102 000 146 000 170 000 290 420 490 27 1-1/16 14 9/16

M 20 x 1,5 139 000 199 000 232 000 430 620 720 30 1-3/16 17 --

M 22 x 1,5 171 000 245 000 285 000 580 820 960 32 -- 17 --

M 24 x 1,5 207 000 295 000 346 000 760 1090 1270 36 1-7/16 19 3/4

M 24 x 2 196 000 280 000 325 000 730 1040 1220 36 1-7/16 19 3/4

M 27 x 1,5 267 000 381 000 445 000 1110 1580 1850 41 1-5/8 19 3/4

M 27 x 2 255 000 365 000 425 000 1070 1500 1800 41 1-5/8 19 3/4

M 30 x 1,5 335 000 477 000 558 000 1540 2190 2560 46 1-13/16 22 7/8

M 30 x 2 321 000 457 000 534 000 1490 2120 2480 46 1-13/16 22 7/8

M 33 x 1,5 410 000 584 000 683 000 2050 2920 3420 50 2 24 --

M 33 x 2 395 000 560 000 660 000 2000 2800 3300 50 2 24 --

M 36 x 1,5 492 000 701 000 820 000 2680 3820 4470 55 2-3/16 27 1-1/16

M 36 x 3 440 000 630 000 740 000 2500 3500 4100 55 2-3/16 27 1-1/16

M 39 x 1,5 582 000 830 000 971 000 3430 4890 5720 60 2-3/8 27 1-1/16

M 39 x 3 530 000 750 000 880 000 3200 4600 5300 60 2-3/8 27 1-1/16

Note: Observe notes on front page!


Tightening torques for screws for SAE split flange installation

Not part of factory standard WN 4037 I


Listing per LFR - Quality service 2QA 6 051 00 as of Oct. 2001

1. Flange and half flange for high pressure (Norm 62)

Tightening torques in Nm for screw grade 10.9


Flange nominal size Screw size flat flange without Flange with
Half flange
reinforcement reinforcement
" M8 31 -- --
" M 10 62 45 65
1" M 12 108 70 110
1 " M 14 172 120 180
1 " M 16 264 170 250
2" M 20 350 250 450

2. Half flange for low pressure (Norm 61)

Tightening torques in Nm for


Flange nominal size Screw size
Screw grade 8.8 Screw grade 10.9
" M8 22 31
" M 10 44 62
1" M 10 44 62
1 " M 10 44 62
1 " M 12 76 108
2" M 12 76 108
2 " M 12 76 108
3" M 14 122 172
3 " M 16 187 264
4" M 16 187 264
5" M 16 187 264

Tightening torques for oil drain plugs at travel gears

Not part of factory standard WN 4037 I


Listing per LBC - Quality service as of Oct. 2003

Oil drain plug Tightening torque


thread size in Nm
M 14x1,5 40
M 16x1,5 40
M 18x1,5 40
M 22x1,5 80
M 33x1,5 160

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Standard screws LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic
Tightening Torques Blatt
01 04 Factory standard WN 4037 I Page
Feuille
1.4.02.02
1. Hole diameter for tapping ISO standard Metric (internal) thread
Hole diameter
Thread
limits Drill bit
size
max. min.
M1 0,785 0,729 0,75
M 1,1 0,885 0,829 0,85
M 1,2 0,985 0,929 0,95
M 1,4 1,160 1,075 1,1
M 1,6 1,321 1,221 1,25
M 1,7 1,346 1,258 1,30
M 1,8 1,521 1,421 1,45
M2 1,679 1,567 1,6
M 2,2 1,838 1,713 1,75
M 2,3 1,920 1,795 1,9
M 2,5 2,138 2,013 2,05
M 2,6 2,176 2,036 2,10
M3 2,599 2,459 2,5
M 3,5 3,010 2,850 2,9
M4 3,422 3,242 3,3
M 4,5 3,878 3,688 3,7
M5 4,334 4,134 4,2
M6 5,153 4,917 5
M7 6,153 5,917 6
M8 6,912 6,647 6,8
M9 7,912 7,647 7,8
M 10 8,676 8,376 8,5
M 11 9,676 9,376 9,6
M 12 10,441 10,106 10,2
M 14 12,210 11,835 12
M 16 14,210 13,835 14
M 18 15,744 15,294 15,5
M 20 17,744 17,294 17,5
M 22 19,744 19,294 19,5
M 24 21,252 20,752 21
M 27 24,252 23,752 24
M 30 26,771 26,211 26,5
M 33 29,771 29,211 29,5
M 36 32,270 31,650 32
M 39 35,270 34,670 35
M 42 37,799 39,129 37,5
M 45 40,799 40,129 40,5
M 48 43,297 42,587 43,0
M 52 47,297 46,587 47,0
M 56 50,796 50,046 50,5
M 60 54,796 54,046 54,1
M 64 58,305 57,505 57,6
M 68 62,305 61,505 61,6

Dimensions are in mm
mm x 0,03937 = inches

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Hole diameter before tapping Blatt


Page
Feuille 01.4.04.01
2. Hole diameter for tapping ISO fine Metric (internal) thread

Hole diameter Hole diameter


Thread size limits Drill bit Thread size limits Drill bit
max. min. max. min.
M 1 x 0,2 0,821 0,783 0,8 M 25 x 1 24,153 23,917 24
M 1,1 x 0,2 0,921 0,833 0,9 M 25 x 1,5 23,676 23,376 23,5
M 1,2 x 0,2 1,021 0,983 1 M 25 x 2 23,210 22,835 23
M 1,4 x 0,2 1,221 1,183 1,2 M 26 x 1,5 24,676 24,376 24,5
M 1,4 x 0,25 1,185 1,129 1,15 M 27 x 1 26,153 25,917 26
M 1,6 x 0,2 1,421 1,383 1,4 M 27 x 1,5 25,676 25,376 25,5
M 1,8 x 0,2 1,621 1,583 1,6 M 27 x 2 25,210 24,835 25
M 2 x 0,25 1,785 1,729 1,75 M 28 x 1 27,153 26,917 27
M 2,2 x 0,25 1,985 1,929 1,95 M 28 x 1,5 26,676 26,376 26,5
M 2,5 x 0,35 2,201 1,121 2,15 M 28 x 2 26,210 25,835 26
M 3 x 0,35 2,721 2,621 2,65 M 30 x 1 29,153 28,917 29
M 3,5 x 0,35 3,221 3,121 3,15 M 30 x 1,5 28,676 28,376 28,5
M 4 x 0,5 3,599 3,459 3,5 M 30 x 2 28,210 27,835 28
M 4,5 x 0,5 4,099 3,959 4 M 30 x 3 27,252 26,752 27
M 5 x 0,5 4,599 4,459 4,5 M 32 x 1,5 30,676 30,376 30,5
M 5,5 x 0,5 5,099 4,959 5 M 32 x 2 30,210 29,835 30
M 6 x 0,75 5,378 5,188 5,2 M 33 x 1,5 31,676 31,376 31,5
M 7 x 0,75 6,378 6,188 6,2 M 33 x 2 31,210 30,835 31
M 8 x 0,75 7,378 7,188 7,2 M 33 x 3 30,252 29,752 30
M8x1 7,153 6,917 7 M 35 x 1,5 33,676 33,376 33,5
M 9 x 0,75 8,378 8,188 8,2 M 36 x 1,5 34,676 34,376 34,5
M9x1 8,153 7,917 8 M 36 x 2 34,210 33,835 34
M 10 x 0,75 9,378 9,188 9,2 M 36 x 3 33,252 32,752 33
M 10 x 1 9,153 8,917 9 M 38 x 1,5 36,676 36,376 36,5
M 10 x 1,25 8,912 8,647 8,8 M 39 x 1,5 37,676 37,376 37,5
M 11 x 0,75 10,378 10,188 10,2 M 39 x 2 37,210 36,835 37
M 11 x 1 10,153 9,917 10 M 39 x 3 36,252 35,752 36
M 12 x 1 11,153 10,917 11,1 M 40 x 1,5 38,676 38,376 38,5
M 12 x 1,25 10,912 10,647 10,8 M 40 x 2 38,210 37,835 38
M 12 x 1,5 10,676 10,376 10,5 M 40 x 3 37,252 36,752 37
M 14 x 1 13,153 12,917 13 M 42 x 1,5 40,676 40,376 40,5
M 14 x 1,25 12,912 112,647 12,8 M 42 x 2 40,210 39,835 40
M 14 x 1,5 12,676 12,376 12,5 M 42 x 3 39,252 38,752 39
M 15 x 1 14,153 13,917 14 M 42 x 4 38,270 37,670 38
M 15 x 1,5 13,676 13,376 13,5 M 45 x 1,5 43,676 43,376 43,5
M 16 x 1 15,153 14,917 15 M 43 x 2 43,210 42,835 43
M 16 x 1,5 14,676 14,376 14,5 M 45 x 3 42,252 41,752 42
M 17 x 1 16,153 15,917 16 M 45 x 4 41,270 40,670 41
M 17 x 1,5 15,676 15,376 15,5 M 48 x 1,5 46,676 46,376 46,5
M 18 x 1 17,153 16,917 17 M 48 x 2 46,210 45,835 46
M 18 x 1,5 16,676 16,376 16,5 M 48 x 3 45,252 44,752 45
M 18 x 2 16,210 15,835 16 M 48 x 4 44,270 43,670 44
M 20 x 1 19,153 18,917 19 M 50 x 1,5 48,676 48,376 48,5
M 20 x 1,5 18,676 18,376 18,5 M 50 x 2 48,210 47,835 48
M 20 x 2 18,210 17,835 18 M 50 x 3 47,252 46,752 47
M 22 x 1 21,153 20,917 21 M 52 x 1,5 50,676 50,376 50,5
M 22 x 1,5 20,676 20,376 20,5 M 52 x 2 50,210 49,835 50
M 22 x 2 20,210 19,835 20 M 52 x 3 49,252 48,752 49
M 24 x 1 23,153 22,917 23 M 52 x 4 48,270 47,670 48
M 24 x 1,5 22,676 22,376 22,5
M 24 x 2 22,210 21,835 22
Sub Group Index
Special tools 2.1
Special tools Liebherr Diesel engine 2.1.10

Special tools general hydraulic repair 2.1.20

Special tools hydraulic pressure testing 2.1.21

Special tools hydraulic cylinder 2.1.22

Special tools general - electric repair 2.1.30

Special tools wiring harness 2.1.31

Special tools mech. components 2.1.40

Repair welding 2.2.00

Installation guidelines 2.3.01


Installation guidelines Duo-Cone-Seals 2.3.01

Wiring installation guidelines ITT-Cannon plug 2.3.02

Wiring installation guidelines Harting plug 2.3.03

Wiring installation guidelines AMP plug 2.3.04

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Special tools LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 01 Application guidelines Blatt


Page 2.0.00.01
Feuille
Description Id.No. Remarks Illustration

Digital Electronic Impulse 7009 538 test range:


Tachometer 400-6000 RPM
accuracy
all engines 1 RPM

Tachometer - mechanical 5003 069 test range:


100-3000 RPM
accuracy:
1 RPM

Tachometer cable 5003 070 to be used with


Id.No. 5003 069
D904 TB / 904 T

Tachometer cable extension 8122 902 to be used with


Id.No. 5003 070
D904 TB / 904 T

Battery charge / coolant 7408 922 to test the condition of


condition tester the battery charge and
the percentage of
antifreeze in the engine
coolant.

Description Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Diesel engine LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Special tools Blatt


Page
Feuille
2.1.10.01
Illustration Description Id.No. Remarks

DCA4 Test kit 5608 459 to test the DCA4


CC2602M concentration in
coolant.
includes:
test strip container all engines
50 test strips
plastic container
eye dropper

Compression tester 8008 782 to check the engines


compression pressure.

all engines

Test adapter for 0524 044 to be used in place of


compression tester injector when checking
compression

all engines

Injector tester 7361 236 to check injector


opening pressure

all engines

High pressure hand pump 7009 318 to check the injection


with accessories, complete pump timing.

all engines
Description Id.No. Remarks Illustration

Slide hammer 0524 072 to remove injectors

all engines

Adapter 0524 029 to be used with


Id.No. 0524 072

all engines

Angle method torque fixture 0524 062 to torque screws


- cylinder head
- main bearings
- rod bearings

all engines

Engine turning fixture 0524 045 mounted on the flywheel


housing

all engines
(not useable at
D 9406 TI - PR 752,
RL 52, use
Id.No. 9183 785)

Dial gauge to control the delivery


Pos.1 7022 418 begin
from the distribution
Dial fixture Pos.2 7022 420 injection pump

all engines with


distribution injection
pump

Description Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Diesel engine LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Special tools Blatt


Page
Feuille
2.1.10.02
Illustration Description Id.No. Remarks

V - Belt Measuring Tool 8042 829 to measure V - Belt


Krikit2 tension

All engines

Holding fixture 0527 462 to eliminate starting fuel


quantity when adjusting
the delivery begin

motors with MW
injection pumps
D914/916
D924/926
D9306/9308
D9406/9408

Sampling pump pos. 1 8145 666 used for taking oil


samples for the oil
1 Sampling valve for oil analysis.
samples pos. 2 7019 068

Oil analysis set German analysis at WEAR


6 samples 7018 368 CHECK Germany,
12 samples 7018 369 analysis report in
German language.

Oil analysis set French Analysis at WEAR


6 samples 8503 561 CHECK Belgium,
analysis report in
French language

Engine turning fixture 9183 785 to turn the Diesel engine


with " square head drive D 9406 TI - PR 752,
RL 52, for adjustments

fits on the fan side end


of crankshaft
Description Id. No. Remarks Illustration

Vacuum pump, complete 7408 148 for faster bleeding of


with the following accessories: the hydraulic system
the vacuum pump can
Vacuum pump with electr. produce low pressure
cord 7407 987 (appr. 0.4 bar) by
Hose assembly 7407 985 reversing the PVC
Hose assembly 7407 986 hose. The connecting
Fitting S8M 7404 619 point for the machine is
Fitting L6R 4901 110 the bleeder screw on
PVC hose 7360 127 the hydraulic tank.
Terminal clamp - pos. 7408 149
Terminal clamp - neg. 7408 150
Plug - 2 connectors 7408 151
Temperature gauge 7020372 accuracy:
2%/2
test range:
-18C - +260C

Adjustment tool commercially to adjust pump end


for BPV 50, 70, 100 available position via eccentric
screw
Tool to loosen / counter
Note: The 12 point
Item.1 socket stub should
12 point socket SW 13 x 85 have an outer diameter
of 18 mm over a length
Adjustment tool of approx. 35 mm

Item.2
Hex head screw handle SW 4 x 200

Item.3 socket wrench SW13 x 120


Hook wrench 7900 282 to loosen / tighten when
58 - 62 mm adjusting the regulating
range of BPV pumps

Adjustment tool for slotted 9792 711 to loosen / tighten lock


nut at HPV 130 nut when adjusting
pump end stop - Qmax
(also usable when
adjusting regulating
range at BPV)
use together with hook
wrench
Id. No. 7900 282

Description Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
General hydraulic repair LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 01 Special tools Blatt


Page 2.1.20.01
Feuille
Illustration Description Id. No. Remarks

Adjustment tool for 9749 025 to loosen / tighten lock


mechanical neutral position nut when adjusting
slotted nut mechanical neutral
HPV 135-02 position.

Clamping tool for clamping 6427 521 to tighten the spring and
spring at BPV remove ball socket
BPV 35 - 200 trumpet tube when
changing swash plate
bearing

Pin puller 6427 516 used to remove the pin


for pump BPV 35 - 100 for the swash plate
bearing cage retainer
clip

Punch to punch the studs -


for stud BPV 70 - 100 change of needle
bearing segment
Swash plate 7413 894

Housing 4713 895

Installation sleeve for radial for correct mounting the


shaft seal radial shaft seal on the
pump drive shaft
BPV 35 70 7404 289
Note:
BPV 100 install seal rings with
HPV 135-02 7404 298 Loctite 270

BPV 200 7404 567


Description Id. No. Remarks Illustration

Measuring device for to measure pressure,


differential pressure 7025 376 differential pressure
contents - 230V and used for Data
230V transfers to the PC

contents of:
measuring device M - H 2045
2 pressure sensors 0-600 bar
2 test fittings
2 test hoses MK 12m
Measuring device for 7025 755 connecting wire - board circuit
differential pressure adapter wire - data transfer
power supply unit
contents 120V

Pressure gauge accuracy:


0-10 5002 865 1% of end value
0-25 7361 289
0-40 7361 288 all pressure gauges are
0-60 5002 867 glycerin filled
0-100 5602 903
0-160 7361 286
0-250 7361 285
0-400 7500 002
0-600 7361 294
0-1000 4601 115
Digital pressure gauge resolution
0,1% of end value
0 - 100 7412 643
accuracy:
0 - 500 7412 644 0,2% of end value

Lithium battery for digital 6002 780 gauge range - static:


pressure gauge up to max. 50 % above
the listed end value

Gauge - coupling to seal the coupling


during pressure tests, a
R 7002 436 seal ring,
Id. No. 7409 794, must
be installed.

Test hose NW 2 to avoid loss of


pressure during tests,
1000 mm 7002 437 use the shortest
1500 mm 7002 475 possible test hose
4000 mm 7009 134
5000 mm 7363 732

Test fitting , complete union nut and ferrule


mounted on test fitting.
R6L 7409 916
R 10 L 7406 864
R 12 L 7409 918

Description Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Hydraulic pressure testing LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Special tools Blatt


Page
Feuille
2.1.21.01
Illustration Description Id. No. Remarks

Screw coupling to connect to additional


machine measuring
M 8x1 7615 321 points
M 10x1 5608 462
M 12x1,5 7409 783
M 14x1,5 7406 865
R 7409 720
Schott screw coupling to connect shorter test
lines or connection
M 16x2 7407 070 between test connection
and pressure sensor

Test plate A to close high pressure


for SAE-flange 7370 092 ports when checking
Size (in mm) system pressures
A 90
B 40
C,r 5 material:
Test plate B ground resilient steel
for SAE - flange 1 7370 093
Size (in mm)
A 90 taper rounded plate
B 44 ends, round off edges
C,r 5
(simplifies installation,
Test plate C
7370 094 prevents damage to O -
for SAE flange 1
Size (in mm)
ring)
A 90
B 52 or to be made in
C,r 5 house
Flange, complete ( 2 each to close high pressure
with O - rings and screws) ports when checking
for support shaft system pressures and
when shaft flange is
PR712/722 9787 796 removed
LR622
RL(4)22 also to protect front
surface when removing
PR732/742 9787 798 support shaft bearings.
LR632
RL(4)42
Fitting to close off control lines
for adjustment of hydr.
pos.1 stopper 2 x 4900 038 motors on the
pos.2 union nut 2 x 4774 001 PR 752
pos 3 elbow fitting 2 x 7403 569
pos 4 reducer fitting 2 x 7404 259
pos 5 fitting 2 x 7410 458
Description Id.No. Remarks Illustration

Diagnostic box with adapter 9796 653 required for


and connecting cables, checking/ adjusting
complete travel drive
all machine types with
(consists of following parts marked electronic control system/
with *)
E-Box Version CEP

for application guidelines,


* Diagnostic box without 7409 318 see group 10.4.
adapter/connecting cables

Time delay fuse - 6.3 A 6002 702


(spare fuse)

*Adapter CET-14/05 7413 106 adapts diagnostic box for


all machine types with E -
box Version CEP

*Adapter cable - straight 9814 970 required for all tests


55-connectors

*Y - Adapter cable 9747 733 additional cable for special


checks in travel operation

Accessory
Protective cap-male plug 6002 655
Protective cap- female socket 6002 654

*Power supply cable 6002 697 power supply cable


complete, consists of:
plug 3 - connections
Instrument panel plug 7409 682
Plug - 3 connectors 7409 676
A: +
Shrink wrapping for 7409 681
B: -
instrument panel plug
C: free
Shrink wrapping - for 3- 7409 679
pole plug
cable 6000 738
instrument panel plug:
Accessory
contact middle: +
Protective cap for plug - 3 7409 677
contact lateral: -
connectors

Description Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Electric system - general LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 03 Special tools Blatt


Page 2.1.30.01
Feuille
Illustration Description Id.No. Remarks

E-box evaluation kit 9812 435 to read E-box memory


consists of for use on CEP 12/08C,
CEP 12/20 and CEP 12/22
Pos. 1 floppy disk with
software CEP 12 7415 329

Pos. 2 adapter cable 9812 434

Pedal tester 7414 235 required for

PR-2-Litronic:
test/adjustment
inch/brake pedal

LR-2 Litronic:
test/adjustment
steering and brake pedal

LIKOM - Service Set 9793 970 required for


consists of: checking/adjusting
LIKOM-Software pos. 1 9758 760 01 travel drive
Interface cable pos. 2 9794 550 - all machine types with
Instructions - not shown electronic control system /
E-Box version RST

for application guidelines,


Accessories
see group 10.5
Note Book
6140 645 01
Voltage transformer 24/230 V
6004 217
Digital multimeter complete 6001 231 for
with harness and case voltage (V)-
amperage (A)-
resistance ()-
and
frequency(Hz)-
tests

Battery charge / coolant 7408 922 to test the condition of the


condition tester battery charge and the
percentage of antifreeze in
the engine coolant

Socket wrench for 9797 973


adjustable sensor motor / gear
or
remachined12 rework as shown in
point socket drawing:
wrench size27 shaded areas must be
mm ground out.
Description Id.No. Remarks Illustration

Hand crimp tool - Cannon 7367 086 to produce flawless


crimp connections.
M 22 5 20/1-01
application, see group
02.3.02.

Crimp insert - Cannon used with hand crimp


tool
CT 120090-20 7409 779 Id.No. 7367 086

TH 452 7367 084 application, see group


02.3.02.

Reference gauge to check the hand


crimp tool
M 22 5 20/3-1 7409 718 Id.No. 7367 086

application, see group


02.3.02.

Insertion tool for CA - B to insert wired crimp


Crimp contacts contacts into the plug
connectors.
CIT-F80-KIT complete 7409 721
consisting of:
1 Handle 7409 693
1 Insert CIT 20 7409 694 application, see group
1 Insert CIT 16 7409 695 02.3.02.
1 Insert CIT 12 7409 696
1 Insert CIT 8 7409 697
1 Insert CIT 4 7409 698
1 Insert CIT 0 7409 699

Extraction tools for CA - B to remove wired crimp


crimp contacts contacts from the plug
connectors.
CET-F80-KIT complete 7409 700 depending if socket or
consisting of: pin contacts are
1 Handle 7409 701 removed, the
1 Insert CET 20 7409 702 corresponding side of
1 Insert CET 16 7409 703 the tool insert should be
1 Insert CET 12 7409 704 used.
1 Insert CET 8 7409 705 application, see group
1 Insert CET 4 7409 706 02.3.02.
1 Insert CET 0 7409 707

Insertion tool for KPSE application, see group


crimp contacts 02.3.02.

MS 24256 A16 7409 708

MS 24256 A20 7409 709

Description Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Electric system - wiring harness LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Special tools Blatt


Page
Feuille
2.1.31.01
Illustration Description Id.No. Remarks

Extraction tool for KPSE application, see group


crimp contacts 02.3.02.

MS 24256 R16 7409 710

MS 24256 R20 7409 711

Insertion tool for SURE application, see group


SEAL crimp contacts, 02.3.02.
complete
CITG-SS-1 7367 023
Insertion tip
CIT-SS-1-TIP 7409 712
Contact holder
CT 317-8666-005 7409 713
Extraction tools for SURE P - valid for extraction
SEAL crimp contacts, of socket contacts.
complete S - valid for extraction
CET-SS-P 7367 020
CET-SS-S 7367 022 application, see group
02.3.02.
Extraction tips
CET-SS-P-TIP 7409 714
CET-SS-S-TIP 7409 715
Guiding pin - Cannon for: when installing socket
CA-B Crimp contacts contacts, guiding pins
Size 15S, 16S, 15, 16: must be used.
226-1017-000 7409 716
Size 25, 12 protection against
226-1018-000 7409 717 damage.
SURE SEAL crimp contacts
CT 317-8588-000 7409 745 application, see group
02.3.02.
Auxiliary tool - Cannon for device for holding
SURE SEAL connectors during
insertion and extraction
CIEF-SS-5-6-7 7367 085 of crimped contacts.

4 notch hand crimp tool for creating perfect


Buchanan crimp connections on
Harting plug
pos1 - Crimp pliers 8123 551 connectors
pos2 - Positioning sleeve 8123 552

Test gauge for inspecting crimp


depth in Harting"
0,5-1 und 2,5 mm 8123 553 connector
1,5 mm 8123 554

Extraction tool for Harting 8123 556 for extraction of crimp


crimp contacts contacts from the
Harting - connector
Description Id.No. Remarks Illustration

Insertion tool for Harting 8123 555 for insertion of


crimp contacts connected crimp
contacts into the
Harting connector

Crimp tool to crimp contacts of


for MATE - N - LOK
MATE-N-LOK crimp contacts connectors

for 1,5 mm 7367 025


for 2,5 mm 7366 314

Extraction tool AMP extraction tool to push a


for crimped contact of the
MATE-N-LOK crimp contacts 7366 655 MATE - N - LOK
connectors
substitute insert 7015 180

Insertion tool AMP 8145 432 to insert pin and socket


for contacts in connectors
MATE-N-LOK Crimp type MATE - N - LOCK
contacts

Hand crimp tool - Cannon 8503 647 to crimp correct


for DEUTSCH Connectors contacts of connectors
type DEUTSCH
crimp turret 7409 779

Extraction tool Cannon extraction tool to push


for crimp contacts pin contacts and socket
DEUTSCH contacts of
AWG 4 8503 633 theDEUTSCH
AWG 8 8503 632 connectors
AWG 12 10 114 733
AWG 16 885 563 714
AWG 20 10 114 732
Crimp tool AMP 7415 333 to crimp the JUNIOR
AMP Certi-Lock POWER TIMER
contacts

Description Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Electric system - wiring harness LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Special tools Blatt


Page
Feuille
2.1.31.02
Illustration Description Id.No. Remarks

Extraction tool AMP 7370 373 extraction tool to


remove contact of the
JUNIOR POWER
TIMER housing

Crimp tool 7409 781 to crimp insulated wire


CSA 0760 contacts 0,75 - 6,0 mm
Example: isolated
connectors

Crimp tool 7409 782 to crimp non insulated


CRB 0560 wire contacts
0,5 - 6,0 mm
Example: connection to
wiper motor
see picture group 9

Wire stripper complete to remove the insulation


on individual wires on
Type 5011-26 7409 777 the electronic wire
harness.
Spare blades 7409 778 0,75 mm

Blade inserts to strip metric to be installed in wire


wires with the following wire stripper
diameters Id.No. 7409 777

1,5 - 6,0 mm 7409 788

0,15 - 2,5 mm 7409 789


Description Id.No. Remarks Illustration

track component 7402 603 application, see


measuring tool group 12.2.

R = ring wrench and to adjust bearing play of


E = adjustment template cross roller bearings
for
PR 712 (B) FAT 400/523 R/E 9054 282* *= with new adjustment R =
template bearings
400C563 R 9790 992
E 8123 439
**= with new adjustment
400P553 R 9790 992 template and new
E 8123 438 pin, can also be
used for newer gear
PR 722 (B) FAT 450/514 R/E 9054 281* types see Service
information
450C564 R 9790 996 11-3-5/94 Litronic)
E 8123 440 E=

PR +LR 622 450P554 R 9790 996


+RL (4)22 E 8123 440
1)
PR 732 (B) FAT 500/525 R/E 9054 280** = 8123 445

500C565 R 9790 999 substitution - carrier / bolt


1)
E 8123 442 = 8123 445
for wrench IdNr. 9790 992 and
PR +LR 632 500P555 R 9790 999 IdNr. 9790 996
E 8123 441 bolt IdNr. 9790 995
1)
PR 742 (B) FAT 550/516 R/E 9054 279** = 8123 446 for wrench IdNr. 9790 999
bolt IdNr. 8123 445
550C566 R 9791 003
1)
E 8123 444 = 8123 446 for wrench IdNr. 9791 003
bolt IdNr. 8123 446
PR +RL 42 550P556 R 9791 003
E 8123 443
special wrench - support to loosen and tighten
shaft the ring nut on the
support shaft
9054 840
PR 712/722
LR 622
RL(4)22
9785 922
PR732/742
LR 632
RL 42

Description Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Mech. components LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Special tools Blatt


Page
Feuille
2.1.40.01
Illustration Description Id.No Remarks

socket wrench - size 22 mm 9745 376 to release / tighten the


for cable fittings on axle flange cable fittings on the
support axle
PR 732 / LR 632
PR 742
RL 42

clamping tool for parking 9814 884 to dissemble and


brakes assemble of the parking
FAT - Type P/D brake at FAT type - P/D

all types measurements for


except PR 752 / RL 52 manufacturing the
clamping tool see page
2.1.40.02

press - in punch for installation of radial


shaft seal in hoist
Pos.1 installation flange cylinder support.
see chapter 15.2.
PR712/722 A 9786 683 A = fr Pos.12
B 9786 684 B = fr Pos.11

PR732 A 9786 685 for dimensions to


B 9786 687 manufacture the punch
see page 2.1.40.02
PR742/752 A 9786 686
B 9786 687
Pos.2 screw in handle for all
installation flanges 9786 688
puller commercially to pull out bushings
Pos.1 with counter support available toll Pos.3 ad Pos.4 from
Pos.2 for the following hoist cylinder bearing
dimensions (in mm) cut open support
bushings, pos. 3
from 120mm
PR712 PR732 PR742 PR752
PR722
A 90 110 120 120
B 70 90 90 90
C 247,5 273 273 280
D 90 96 94 120

tension tool track adjuster to install and remove


unit the spring in the track
roller frame on the PR
Pos. 1 - installation flange 9798 353 752. absolutely requires

Pos. 2 - bar 9798 352

Pos. 3 - hex head screw (6 4601 217 application, see


pieces.) group 12.5.50
M16x310mm - 10.9
Description Id.No. Remarks Illustration

Mounting sleeve 9817 062 for installation of


outside bearings at the
equalizer bar PR 752

Dimensions to self - manufacture from special tools


1. For disassembly and assembly of the brake housing travel gear FAT - type A / C (without Id. No.)

PR 712 PR 722 PR 732 PR 742


Dim FAT 400/523 FAT 450/514 FAT 500/525 FAT 550/516
(mm) FAT 400 C 563 FAT 450 C 564 FAT 500 C 565 FAT 550 C 566
A 315 340 360 395
B 380 400 420 460
C 22 22 22 26
D M20 x 2,5 M20 x 2,5 M20 x 2,5 M24 x 3
E 130 150 170 190
F 30 30 30 36
G 16 16 16 18
H 21 21 21 25
I 36 36 36 44

Dimensions on drawing are valid for all travel gears FAT 400 to
550.

2. For disassembly and assembly of the brake housing travel gear FAT - type P / D (Id. No. see page 2.1.40.01)

Pos. Description Id.No.

1 washer with nut M20 (welded on) 160 mm 9814 883


2 washer for machine size X32, X42 160 mm 9814 881
3 washer for machine size X12, X22 130 mm 9814 882
4 screw M20 x 110 10.9 A3C 4600 161
5 washer A3C 4600 222

Description Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Mech. components LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Special tools Blatt


Page
Feuille
2.1.40.02
3. Mandrel for radial seal ring in lift cylinder bearing
see crawler dozers service manual, chapter 15.2.(Id. No. see page 2.1.40.01)

3.1. Screw type handle


page 2.1.40.01 - item 2, fits for following installation flanges

all dimensions in mm

3.2. Installation flange


page 2.1.40.01 - item 1
A for Pos.12, B for Pos.11 from group 15.2.

Id.No. Ma A Ma B Ma C DIM D
-0,3 0,1
PR 712 / 722 A 9786 683 119 89 12 23
-0,3 0,1
B 9786 684 71 57 8 18
-0,3 0,1
PR 732 A 9786 685 139 109 14 23
B 9786 687 89
-0,3
69
0,1
10 18 *edges rounded
-0,3 0,1
PR 742/752 A 9786 686 149 119 14 23
-0,3 0,1
B 9786 687 89 69 10 18

4. Intermediate flange travel pump to regulating pump, see 8.1.01.02


PR712(B) - PR732(B), LR622/LR632, RL(4)22 B
With pulling device, IdNo.0524 072 - section 02.1.10.02.,
or with screw M10x100

all dimensions in mm
Prior to beginning any welding on earthmoving equipment, the battery cables and the wires on connection B+ and
D- on the alternator must be disconnected and the electronic control box must be removed. In addition, the ground
cable of the welding unit must be connected directly to the bare metal of the part to be welded.

1. Preparation of a crack
The crack must be free of paint, grease and dirt.
To prevent the crack from extending during the preparation or the welding process, the end of the cracks should
be drilled with a hole of at least 0.32" (8mm) in diameter.
The crack should now be ground, chiseled, torch cut or arced out at a 60 angle. Be certain the edges are clean
and extend through the full cross section of the material, without exceeding the 0.04" (1 mm) space in the lower
part. On larger grooves, a welding safety should be installed.

Certain materials must be preheated to 300F (150C) prior to welding.


Special preparations are necessary when preparing a crack in manganese steel. Due to its hardness,
mechanical preparation, such as a chisel or hobbing machine is not possible. We suggest that the crack is
prepared with a slow running and water cooled grinding wheel to prevent overheating.
Other possibilities for preparing cracks or removing high alloy welding seams are the use of cutting electrodes of
the type UTP 82 AS.

2. Preparation of a weld
The area to be welded must be free of paint, grease, oil, moisture and dirt. During rain, the area to be welded
must be covered. Materials with a thickness above 0.60" (15 mm), high carbon steel or steel which is difficult to
weld, the material must be preheated to approximately 176- 392F (80- 200C).
Pre-heating is also necessary when the ambient or component temperature is below 40F (5C) or when the
construction of the component prevent the welding stress to be released.

3. Storing Electrodes
Use only dry and undamaged electrodes. Electrodes which are rusty or damaged should not be used. Electrodes
should be stored in a dry room with a minimum temperature of 59F (15C). Open packages should be carefully
closed and stored after the welding work is completed.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Repar Welding Blatt


Page
Feuille 2.2.00.01
4. Welding Technique
The welding of material with the necessary electrodes (see table under paragraph 7) is in accordance with DIN
1912.
The adjustment of the welding machine - dictated by the different thicknesses of the electrodes - can be taken
from the table of the electrode package.
Beginning with a material thickness of 1/4" (8 mm), butt welds must be made in several layers. The weld is
applied in several beads. Wide butt welds are filled with several side by side beads, with the last layer covering
the center. The electrode should melt evenly without creating burrs and peaks. The valley or crater, which is
created when changing electrodes must be filled in and overlapped with the next electrode. To prevent cracks in
those craters, care must betaken that they are properly filled.
If the crack extends towards the outer edge of the material, slag may be trapped or burn holes may be created.
To prevent this, the following aid may be used: Tack a piece of sheet metal to the outer edge of the material. The
welding seam begins now at the sheet metal in the direction of the arrow. After the welding is completed, the
sheet metal is removed and the edge of the material is ground smooth.

The weld must cool off slowly and should therefore be protected from rain and wind.

5. Reinforcement of the welding seam


If the crack of the material is due to an overload or abuse, a reinforcement plate should be welded over the
crack. The selection of the correct reinforcement plate is based on the construction and load factors of the
component to be repaired.
For this reason, only general recommendations can be made as to the size and shape of the reinforcement
plates.

6. General application of reinforcement plates

6.1. Shape of reinforcement plates


The crossover or connection between the reinforced and not reinforced part should be as gradual as possible.
This means that the size of the plate should be selected in such a way that new or unacceptable high stress in
the repaired parts are avoided. Plates with sharp corners (such as a rectangular plate) should not be used.

Suitable reinforcement plate with Suitable reinforcement plate against


high tensile strength. bending and alternating loads.
6.2. Plate Thickness
The thickness of the reinforcement plate should be up to 2/3 (66%) of the thickness of the material to be
reinforced.

6.3. Plate Quality


The yield and tensile strength of the reinforcement plate should be equal to the material to be reinforced.

6.4. Plate Installation


The welded area of the crack should be ground so it is smooth and level.
The size of the plate must be selected in such a way that the longer sides of the plate extend into the
connecting construction of the material to be reinforced. The plate should also overlap the crack on each side
by at least 1" (20 mm). The correct position and fit of the reinforcement plate is achieved through clamping and
spot welding.

6.5. Plate Welding


The reinforcement plate should be welded on by running a welding bead alternately on both sides. The welding
should always start in the middle of the plate and run towards the outside. Be certain to observe that each
welding seam has proper run out.

Direction of weld Direction of weld


The size of the welding run "a" is figured out in reference to the thickness "k" of the reinforcement plate.
Use formula: a=0,5 k
Up to a welding run "a" of approx. 1/8" (3 mm) a single run can be made, however, as a general rule, a double
run should be preferred.
Above a welding run "a" of 1/8"(3 mm), the first run provides excellent penetration between the reinforcement
plate and the basic material. Subsequent runs are added on top of the first run.

After the welding is completed, clean the welding seam as necessary. Grind the run out between reinforcement
plate and basic material.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Repar Welding Blatt


Page
Feuille 2.2.00.02
7. Selecting the correct electrodes
For repair welding, only lime based {Kb} electrodes should be used, and as a rule, the electrodes {additional
material} should be "softer" than the basic material. Exceptions to this rule should be observed.
Important: To reach the theoretical welding quality, the work must not only be performed in a
professional manner, the electrode manufacturer's guidelines must absolutely be observed as
well.
Welding of vertical-down welds on steel components is not permissible!

7.1. Electrode Selection


Electrode - Protective gas welding wire
Welding area Material
norm description norm description
BASIC MACHINE
Roller frame - Main St 52 - 3 according to EN 499: according to EN 440:
frame QStE 380 N E42 5 B 4 2 H5 G4Si1
according to AWS A5.1-91: according to AWS A5.18-93:
E7018-1 H4 R ER 70 S-6
LH 690 according to EN 757: according to EN 12534:
preheat to app. E 69 6 Mn2NiCrMo B 4 2 H5 G3CrNi1Mo
100-150C according to AWS A5.5-96: according to AWS A5.28-96:
(210-300F) E 11018-G ER110S-G
ATTACHMENT
Blade Q St E 380 N according to EN 499: according to EN 440:
Bucket HARDOX 400 E42 5 B 4 2 H5 G4Si1
according to AWS A5.1-91: according to AWS A5.18-93:
E7018-1 H4 R ER 70 S-6
Push frame St 52 - 3 according to EN 499: according to EN 440:
Bucket arm E42 5 B 4 2 H5 G4Si1
RL-Boom according to AWS A5.1-91: according to AWS A5.18-93:
E7018-1 H4 R ER 70 S-6
LH 690 according to EN 757: according to EN 12534:
preheat to app. E 69 6 Mn2NiCrMo B 4 2 H5 G3CrNi1Mo
100-150C according to AWS A5.5-96: according to AWS A5.28-96:
(210-300F) E 11018-G ER110S-G
Ripper St 52 - 3 according to EN 499: according to EN 440:
Q St E 380 N E42 5 B 4 2 H5 G4Si1
HARDOX 400 according to AWS A5.1-91: according to AWS A5.18-93:
E7018-1 H4 R ER 70 S-6
WEAR ITEMS
Adapter, Tooth adapter Special steel Root runs Root runs
Ripper according to EN 499: according to EN 440:
E42 5 B 4 2 H5 G4Si1
according to AWS A5.1-91: according to AWS A5.18-93:
E7018-1 H4 R ER 70 S-6
Cover layers with Cover layers with
high-strength electrode high-strength electrode
according to EN 1600: according to EN 12072:
E 18 8 Mn B 2 2 G 18 8 Mn
according to AWS A5.4-92: according to AWS A5.9-93:
E 307-15 ER307
7.2. Steel Table

Description Explanation Analysis


HARDOX 400 Weldable, low alloy special steel highly C 0,27% Si 0,7%
wear resistant, tensile strength 1250 N/mm Mn 1,6% Cr 1,4%
yield strength 1000 N/mm Mo 0,6%

Q St E 380 N Structural steel poured at low turbulence C 0,18%


with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength Si 0,5%
of 500 - 640 N/mm and minimum yield Mn 1,6%
strength of 380 N/mm
Special steel Highly abrasion resistant steel with a tensile C = 0,3% Mn = 0,7%
strength of 1720 N/mm Si = 0,5% Cu = 0,65%
Mo = 0,3% V = 0,05%
St 52 - 3 Structural steel poured at low turbulence C 0,22%
S355J2G3 with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength
of 510 N/mm
LH 690 Heat treated fine grain structural steel with C 0,18% Si 0,50%
a tensile strength of 770 - 940 N/mm and Mn 1,5% Mo 0,5 %
yield strength of 690 N/mm Ni 1,5 %
lightly alloyed with V, AI and Cu

7.3. Welding addition chart

7.3.1 For arc welding

Description Explanation Analysis - Value in % / Use


according to EN 499: E = Arc welding, Rod electrode C = 0,07, Si = 0,5, Mn = 1,1
E42 5 B 4 2 H5 42 = 500-640 N/mm Tensile strength
5 = Value for resistance to impact For connection and application
e.g. Bhler B = Shielded metal arc welding, especially for steel with low
FOX EV 50 4 = Reference number for run out and purity and higher carbon content.
type of flow Weldable with direct current, electrode
2 = Reference number for welding connected to plus terminal (+).
positions No vertical seams
H5 = maximum hydrogen content
according to EN 757: E = Arc welding, Rod electrode C = 0,05, Si = 0,4, Mn = 1,5,
E 69 6 Mn2NiCrMo B 4 2 H5 69 = 760-960 N/mm Tensile strength Cr = 0,4, Ni = 2,0, Mo = 0,5
6 = Value for resistance to impact
e.g. Bhler Mn2NiCrMo = Chemical composition For welding, which require high
FOX EV 85 B = Shielded metal arc viscosity and crack resistance. Use for
4 = Reference number for run out and high tensile refined fine-grained steel.
type of flow Very low hydrogen content in weld
2 = Reference number for welding metal.
positions Weldable with direct current, electrode
H5 = maximum hydrogen content connected to plus terminal (+).
No vertical seams
according to EN 1600: E = Arc welding, Rod electrode C = 0,1, Si = 0,7, Mn = 6,5,
E 18 8 Mn B 2 2 18 = 620-770 N/mm Tensile strength Cr = 18,8, Ni = 8,8
8 = Value for resistance to impact
e.g. Bhler Mn = Chemical composition For connections between various
FOX A 7 B = Shielded metal arc alloyed and steel which is difficult to
2 = Reference number for run out and weld.
type of flow Weldable with direct current, electrode
2 = Reference number for welding connected to plus terminal (+).
positions No vertical seams

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Repar Welding Blatt


Page
Feuille 2.2.00.03
7.3.2 For MIG welding with solid electrodes:

Description Explanation Analysis - Value in % / Use


according to EN 440: G = MIG welding with solid electrodes C = 0,1, Si = 1,0, Mn = 1,7
G4Si1 4 = 500-640 N/mm Tensile strength
Si = Chemical composition For connection and application welding,
e.g. Bhler 1 = Reference number for run out and especially for steel with low purity and
EMK 8 type of flow higher carbon content.
Weldable with direct current, electrode
connected to plus terminal (+).
Protective gases: Argon + 15-20% CO2
or 100% CO2
No vertical seams
according to EN 12534: G = MIG welding with solid electrodes C = 0,1, Si = 0,6, Mn = 1,6, Cr = 0,25,
G3CrNi1Mo 3 = 900 N/mm Tensile strength Ni = 1,3, Mo = 0,25, V = 0,1
CrNi1Mo = Chemical composition
e.g. Bhler For welding, which require high viscosity
X 70 - IG and crack resistance. Use for high
tensile refined fine-grained steel.
Weldable with direct current, electrode
connected to plus terminal (+).
Protective gases: Argon + 15-20% CO2
or 100% CO2
No vertical seams
according to EN 12072: G = MIG welding with solid electrodes C = 0,08, Si = 0,9, Mn = 7,0,
G 18 8 Mn 18 = 580-730 N/mm Tensile strength Cr = 19,2, Ni = 9,0
8 = Value for resistance to impact
e.g. Bhler Mn = Chemical composition For connections between various
A7 IG alloyed and steel which is difficult to
weld.
Weldable with direct current, electrode
connected to plus terminal (+).
Protective gases: Argon+max. 2,5% CO2
No vertical seams
Duo-cone seal design for: sealing against outside, sealing against inside

1 Retainer
2 O-ring
3 Metal ring
4 Sealing surface

Note: At the present time, for design reasons, we


only use seals protecting against the outside.

Duo-cone seals are precision components made out of chilled cast iron. They are manufactured in pairs and should
never be mixed whether they are new or used.
Avoid shocks and beats as the sealing surfaces of the metal seal rings can get damaged.
Eliminate sharp edges on the seal-retainers.
Before installation the Duo-Cone-Seals and the retainers must be clean and free of grease. The toric or O-rings may
not be oiled.

Installation: Push the seal rings (with toric ring) with an installation tool into the seal seat. Even pressure must be
exerted on the toric ring around the complete circumference to push the toric ring past the seal
retaining lip.
A standard installation tool, as shown on the reverse side, is folded over the seal ring and transfers
even pressure directly onto the toric ring.
If no suitable installation aid is available, place a round rubber cord or coil spring (as shown below) to
provide a distance between the seal ring and the O-ring and hold it so that the O-ring cannot roll up on
the conical seal ring surface when each half of the seal ring is pressed in.

1 Retainer
2 O-ring
3 Metal ring
5 Installation tool
6 Installation aid, such as coil
spring, rubber cord or rope,
etc.

If no installation tool is used, the toric O-ring can roll up on the conical seal seat surface. If pressure is exerted only
on one side, the seal may not be positioned vertically and / or the O-ring can be distorted. These installation
problems can cause leaks as well as damage to the sealing surfaces.
Installation position: incorrect - incorrect -

correct O-ring Seal


distorted is not vertical

Before the components are assembled, check if the seal rings protrude evenly. Measure the distance from the seal
seat to the seal rings on at least 3 locations, 120 apart.
Check the sealing surfaces again to ensure they are clean and lightly lubricated.
Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Installation guidelines LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 02 Duo-Cone-Seals Blatt
Page
Feuille 2.3.01.01
Listing of available installation tools for travel gear - Duo-Cone seals:

The tools may be ordered by the spare parts dept. from Liebherr Werk Telfs
GmbH. - under the description of "Duo-Cone-Seal installation tool" and the
corresponding Id. No.

Gear - Gear - Machine - Duo cone seal - Installation tool -


Type Ident-No. Type PR/LR/RL Ident-No. tool number Ident-No.
FAT 400 / 523 9443 850 712 7610 242 07590 39022 1001 7428
FAT 450 / 514 9443 090 722 7610 243 07590 38886 1001 7430
FAT 500 / 525 9443 100 732 7610 244 07590 38891 1001 7436
FAT 550 / 516 9443 105 742 7610 245 07590 39023 1001 7433

FAT 400 C 563 9443 410 712 7610 544 07590 39022 1001 7428
FAT 450 C 564 9443 430 722 7610 545 07590 38886 1001 7430
FAT 500 C 565 9443 450 732 7610 543 07590 38891 1001 7436
FAT 550 C 566 9443 470 742 7610 546 07590 39023 1001 7433

FAT 500 P 595 D 9444 380 x32 7610 244 07590 38891 1001 7436
7610 249 00100 07500 1001 8934
FAT 550 P 596 D 9444 390 x42 7610 245 07590 39023 1001 7433
7610 548 07590 41339 1001 7456

FAT 400 P 553 9443 340 x12 7610 242 07590 39022 1001 7428
FAT 450 P 554 9443 270 x22 7610 243 07590 38886 1001 7430
FAT 500 P 555 9443 310 x32 7610 244 07590 38891 1001 7436
FAT 550 P 556 9443 390 x42 7610 245 07590 39023 1001 7433

FAT 400 D 583 9444 305 x12 7610 244 07590 38891 1001 7436
7610 242 07590 39022 1001 7428
FAT 450 D 584 9444 315 x22 7610 245 07590 39023 1001 7433
7610 243 07590 38886 1001 7430
FAT 500 D 585 9444 260 x32 7610 237 07590 41338 1001 7468
7610 244 07590 38891 1001 7436
FAT 550 D 586 9444 325 x42 7610 548 07590 41339 1001 7456
7610 245 07590 39023 1001 7433

FAT 650 / 508 9443 830 x52 7610 241 00100 01300 1001 7472
7610 245 07590 39023 1001 7433
1 General repair guidelines
2 Crimp tool and use
3 Installation guidelines - CA - B / CA - COM - B cable connector
4 Installation guidelines - KPSE cable connector
5 Installation guidelines - SURE SEAL cable connector
6 Installation guidelines - DEUTSCH cable connector

1. General Repair Guidelines


When working with cable connectors, the following must be observed:

Keep hands, work place and connectors clean, dry and free of grease.

Always use the special installation tool - see paragraph 3.1.31 - for installation. For CA - COM - B connectors
use the same special tool as for CA - B connectors. Check tools for wear before use - a wrong or defective
tool as well as improper handling can damage the cable connector components.

When cutting cables to proper length, make sure they are the same length and the cutting edge is straight.
Do not compress or squeeze the cable.

For 90 cable routing, cut the cable to proper length when in angled position.

The cable covering must reach under the crimp joint.

Check installation guidelines for correct length to be stripped. When stripping the cable, make sure that the
individual wires are not damaged, kinked, bent or soiled.

Before installation, check crimp connections of all contacts:

- Individual wires must be visible in the inspection hole of the


contact.

- All wires must be tightly caught in the crimp connection.

- The wire insulation must reach the contact.

When removing and reinstalling contacts, make sure to check the


flow direction and use isopropyl alcohol (rubbing alcohol) as a lubricant, do not twist contacts and tool.

Do not reuse damaged parts. Contacts in size 60/100, 160 and 500 can only be crimped hydraulically. If
these contacts are damaged, the complete wire must be replaced.

Make sure all parts are positioned correctly, check charts!.

On straight cable feeds, insert the contacts from the center to the outside. On 90 cable feeds, insert them in
a row from the bottom to the top.

Even contacts, which are not wired, need to be installed. Close off any empty chambers with a plug.

Visually check if all mating ends of the contacts are at the same level.

Route the wires free of tension and fasten them.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Wiring installation guidelines LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 ITT-Cannon plug Blatt


Page
Feuille
2.3.02.01
2. Use of crimp tool

2.1. Adjust the manual crimp tool - M 22 520 / 01 - 01

Set the selector dial on the handle to the appropriate diameter, see installation
guidelines on wiring chart.

2.2. To adjust turret head TH 452 and CT 1200 90 - 20


Install the proper turret head with a 9/64 Allen wrench.
Push switch 1.
Adjust color coded crimp position on knob 2 according to the wiring chart.
Push knob 2 in to the stop and push the tool once more.

2.3. Use

Before crimping, strip the wire endings to the length noted in the
installation guidelines, using the appropriate tool - see paragraph
2.1.31.
Insert the stripped wires into the contact crimp sleeve as far as possible
until they are visible in the inspection port
Insert contact and wire into the preset crimp tool.
Push the tool handles together all the way.

Note:
The locking mechanism will not allow you to open the tool until the crimping operation has been completed.
Pull the crimped contact with wire from tool. Check the crimp, see paragraph 1.

2.4. Check crimp tool wear.


Check the crimping die for wear with a M 22 520 / 3 - 1 gauge (see paragraph
2.1.31.02), without the crimping head in place.
Set the dial on the handles of the crimp tool to No. 4.
Turret both sides of the gauge into the crimp opening of the tool.
The GREEN - side (good) must fit easily between the crimp dies, or the
adjustment of the tool and the crimp die must be checked.
The RED - side (oversize) may not fit, or the tool are not closed all the way
or the crimp dies are worn and must be replaced.

Caution: Do not operate the crimp tool when the gauge is inserted!
3. Installation Guidelines for CA - B / CA - COM - B Cable Connectors

3.1. Description
A = Plug B = Socket
Components
1 Grommet
2 Insulator
3 Cylinder barrel
3.1 Seal ring
4 End bell with nut
5 Bayonet coupling nut
5.1 Spring washer
(on CA-COM-B)
6 Socket contacts
7 Pin contacts

Tightening torque for end bell: CA 3106 E 32- 8SB 03


Size: CA 06COM E 32- 8SB 03 LH
10 SL max. 3 Nm Other specifications
14S/14 max. 5 Nm Size
20 max. 9 Nm Classification
32 max. 15 Nm Type of housing
Model

3.2. Overview table


Number / Type of
Plug Description Contact - Size Insertion Tool Crimp Tool Notes
S=Socket, P=Pins
Removal: CET-F80-16 Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 15
CA 3106 E 32-8SB-03 24 / S - 15
CA 06 COM-E 32-8SB- Installation: CIT-F80-16 Turret: TH 452 metric
03-LH
Socket (30 pole) on main Removal: CET-F80-12 Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 25
wiring harness - large 6 / S - 25
Installation: CIT-F80-12 Turret: TH 452 metric
Removal: CET-F80-16 Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 15
24 / P - 15
CA 3106 E 32-8SB-04 Installation: CIT-F80-16 Turret: TH 452 metric
Plug (30 pole) in
instrument panel for main Removal: CET-F80-12 M 22520/1-01
Tool: Contact size 25
wiring harness large 6 / P - 25
Installation: CIT-F80-12 Turret: TH 452 metric
Removal: CET-F80-16 Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 15
16 / S - 15
Installation: CIT-F80-16 Turret: TH 452 metric
Removal: CET-F80-12 Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 25
CA 3106 E 32-6SB-03 2 / S - 25
CA 06 COM-E 32-6SB- Installation: CIT-F80-12 Turret: TH 452 metric
03-LH
Socket (23 pole) on main Removal: CET-F80-8
wiring harness small 3 / S - 60
Installation: CIT-F80-8 If these crimp contacts
Hydraulic crimp tool and
are damaged, replace
hand pump
Removal: CET-F80-4 small instrument cable kit
2 / S - 160
Installation: CIT-F80-4

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Wiring installation guidelines LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 ITT-Cannon plug Blatt


Page
Feuille
2.3.02.02
Number / Type of
Plug Description Contact - Size Insertion Tool Crimp Tool Notes
S=Socket, P=Pins
Removal: CET-F80-16 Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 15
16 / P - 15
Installation: CIT-F80-16 Turret: TH 452 metric
Removal: CET-F80-12 Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 25
2 / P - 25
CA 3106 E 32-6PB-04 Installation: CIT-F80-12 Turret: TH 452 metric
Plug (23 pole) in
instrument panel for main Removal: CET-F80-8
wiring harness small 3 / P - 60
Installation: CIT-F80-8 If these crimp contacts
Hydraulic crimp tool and
are damaged, replace
hand pump
Removal: CET-F80-4 small instrument cable kit
2 / P - 160
Installation: CIT-F80-4

CA 3102 E 20-27 SB-03-


A176 Removal: CET-F80-16 M 22520/1-01
CA 06 COM-E 20-27 SB-
Tool: Contact size 15
14 / S - 15
03-LH Socket (14 pole) Installation: CIT-F80-16 Turret: TH 452 metric
on electronic wiring
harness for joystick

CA 3106 E 14S-6 SB-03-


A176
CA 06 COM-E 14S-6 SB-
03-LH Socket (6 pole) on Removal: CET-F80-16 Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 15S
electronic wiring harness 6 / S - 15 S
Installation: CIT-F80-16 Turret: TH 452 metric
for engine speed sensing
potentiometer and
outrigger wiring harness -
right / left

CA 3106 E 10SL-3SB-03
CA 06 COM-E 10 SL- Removal: CET-F80-16 M 22520/1-01
3SB-03-LH Plug (6 pole)
Tool: Contact size 15S
6 / P - 15 S
on outrigger wiring Installation: CIT-F80-16 Turret: TH 452 metric
harness right / left for
electronic wiring harness
CA 3106 E 10SL-3SB-03
CA 06 COM-E 10 SL- Removal: CET-F80-16
3SB-03-LH Socket Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 15S
(3pole) on electronic and 3 / S - 15 S Installation: CIT-
Turret: TH 452 metric
variable motor wiring F80-16
harness - left / right for
solenoid valves
For guide pins and various additional tools , see paragraph 2.1.31

3.3. Removal of Contacts


Note general guidelines in paragraph 1.

Carefully lift the plastic insulation (see manufacturer s guidelines), slit it


carefully and remove.
Caution: Do not damage the insulation and wires inside the
cover insulation!

Unscrew the housing from the cylinder and push the seal over the wires.
Push out the contacts with appropriate tool out of the insulator - see paragraph 3.2 by applying even and
continuous pressure towards the connector, keep the tool parallel to the axis of the plug connector. Stop when
the shoulder of the tool touches the front of the insulator. Carefully pull
the tool from the insulator.
Remove all contacts in the same way, make sure to note different
versions / tools.
Important: The tool must fit properly into or over the contacts.

The housing and seal normally stay on the wiring. If necessary, pull the
wires and contacts carefully from the seal, remove the housing from
the wires.

3.4. To wire the Contacts


Contact size Contact Wire diameter Adjustment - Crimp tool
Stripping
type Color
length
Metric AWG S=Socket mm AWG Dial No. Crimping
(mm)
P=Pin insert
P +0,5 5 blue
1,0 18 6,0
S 5 green
15S 16S
P 6 blue
1,5 16 6,0+0,5
S 6 green
P 5 green
1,0 18 6,0+0,5
S 5 red
15 16
P +0,5 6 green
1,5 16 6,0
S 6 red
P +0,5 8 red
25 12 2,5 12 6,0
S 8 red
Strip the wire as noted on chart and crimp - see paragraph 2.1 to 2.3

3.5. Insertion of Contacts


Note general guidelines in paragraph 1.
Push the plastic insulation over the housing onto the wires.
If housing and sealer were removed, push on housing, dip seal into isopropyl alcohol and guide contact with
cable from the side marked with letter. Use the appropriate insertion tool.

Important: The seal housing must align with the insulator housing!
Note the installation position of the wire as noted on number coding plan.

Insert contacts into the guide tool, push the insertion tool to the top of the
connector tip.
On socket type contacts, insert guide pin. Dip in isopropyl alcohol and insert
straight into insulator until it snaps into position.

Important: Make sure to check number coding chart.

Remove guide pin and insertion tool. Slightly pull the wire to check proper
seating of the contact, plug chambers with empty contacts.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Wiring installation guidelines LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 ITT-Cannon plug Blatt


Page
Feuille
2.3.02.03
Push sealer and housing into cylinder housing, carefully tighten nut. If necessary, use the counter part of the
connector as a retainer.

To retain all parts, loosen nut by 1/4 turn and retighten properly, secure with adhesive.

On electronic wiring harness, insert heat seal (Ray-blocker) on end of insulation and adhere during the following
shrinking procedure.

Pull shrink fit sleeve over housing and evenly heat with hot air blower
until all parts are tightly covered.

Caution: Do not pull the wires during the shrink fit procedure. Do
not apply heat above 125 C (257 F).

4. Installation Guidelines KPSE plug Connector

4.1. Design
A = Socket B = plug
Item listing
1 Insulator
1.1 Contact retainer
(integrated in insulator)
2 Barrel
2.1 Seal ring
3 Cone ring
4 Housing
5 Bayonet coupling nut
6 Socket type contact with crimped
wire
7 Pin type contact with crimped wire

Tightening torque for end bell:


Size:
8, 10 max. 4 Nm
12,14,16 max. 6 Nm
18, 20, 22, 24 max. 10 Nm

KPSE 06 E 22- 21PB DN

Other specifications
Size
Classification
Type of housing
Model
4.2. Chart
Number / Type of
contact size Insertion tool Crimp tool Notes
Plug description
S=Socket, P=Pins
Removal: MS24256 R16
KPSE 06E22-21PB-DN Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 16 per
Plug (21 pole) on wiring 21 / P - 16 Installation: MS24256
Insert: CT120090-20 AWG
harness - Cab A16

KPSE 07E22-21SB Removal: MS24256 R16


Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 16 per
Socket (21 pole) in 21 / S - 16
instrument panel for Installation: MS24256 AWG
Insert: CT120090-20
Wiring harness - Cab A16

KPSE 06E22-55SB-DN Removal: MS24256 R20


Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 20 per
Socket (55 pole) on 55 / S - 20
electronic wiring harness Installation: MS24256 AWG
Insert: CT120090-20
for electronic box A20

KPSE 06E8-3A SB-DN Removal: MS24256 R20


Tool: M 22520/1-01 Contact size 20 per
Plug (3 pole) on var. 3 / S - 20
motor wiring harness left / Installation: MS24256 AWG
Insert: CT120090-20
right for RPM sensor A20

4.3. Removal of contacts


Note general guidelines in paragraph 1 .
Carefully cut and remove shrink fit sleeve per manufacturers guidelines.

Important: Do not damage insulator and inside wires.

Remove housing, loosen cone ring, housing cone and push nut over the wires.
Select proper removal tool for contact size per paragraph 4.2.
Check and apply tool first while empty, check the ejector point and hollow needle for damage. Improper or
damaged tools can damage plug parts.
On pin contacts set tool above the pin until mark 1 straight on the
insulator. On jack contacts, insert tool over socket until mark 2 into
the insulator.

Applying even pressure to tool, move ejector with thumb and


forefinger forward and push contact from retainer clip.

Carefully remove tool from insulator and pull contact by the wire from
the socket.

Remove all contacts the same way. Remove all connector


components from wire harness.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Wiring installation guidelines LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 ITT-Cannon plug Blatt


Page
Feuille
2.3.02.04
4.4. Wiring of contacts
Contact size Contact Wire diameter Adjustment - Crimp Tool
Insulator
type Color
Length
AWG S=Jack mm AWG Dial No. Crimping
(mm)
P=Pins Insert
P
20 0,96 18 5,0 5 red
S
P
16 1,5 16 6,5 6 blue
S
Insulate wire as noted on chart and crimp - see paragraph 2.1 to 2.3

4.5. Installation of Contacts


Note general guidelines in paragraph 1..

Push the shrink fit sleeve and nut in proper sequence over the wires.
Insert contact (see chart) by hand into reverse side of plug, until the top of the
contact is no more than 3 mm from the insulator.

Push appropriate guide tool over the contact connector and hold it vertical to
the front the insulator. Contact size 16 and 12 are inside the tool, the tool
pushed against the top of the contact. On contacts, size 20, the side pushes
against the end of the contact, therefore the contact is farther outside the tool.

Dip all parts in isopropyl alcohol and push evenly into insulator until you hear
the contact click in.

Remove the tool and check if the contact is seated properly by a slight pull on the wires. Close off empty
chambers with plug.
Push cone ring as far as possible over the insulator. Apply isopropyl alcohol to lubricate contact surfaces. Push
housing, on sockets also nut, onto cylinder housing and tighten carefully. If necessary, use plug connector part
as holder. To set the parts, loosen the housing by 1/4 turn, retighten and secure with adhesive.

Pull shrink fit sleeve over housing and evenly heat with heater fan until
all parts are tightly covered.

Caution: Do not pull the wires during the shrink fit procedure.
Do no apply heat above 125 C (257 F).
5. Installation Guidelines SURE SEAL Plug Connector

5.1. Design
A = Plug B= Socket
1 Housing
2 Pin type contact
3 Socket type contact
4 Seal

5.2. Chart
Number / Type of
contact Insertion Tool Crimp Tool Notes
Plug description
S=Jack, P=Pin
SURE SEAL SS 5 P plug
2-P Removal: CET-SS-P/S Tool: M 22520/1-01
P valid only for
(5 pole) on electronic - removal of socket
3-S Installation: CITG-SS-1 Insert: CT120090-20
wiring harness
SURE SEAL SS 5 R plug S valid only for
(5 pole) on var. motor 3-P Removal: CET-SS-P/S Tool: M 22520/1-01 removal of pin type
wiring harness - left/ right 2-S Installation: CITG-SS-1 Insert: CT120090-20 contacts

5.3. Removal of contacts


Note general guidelines in paragraph 1.
Remove the plug, loosen connection. Remove shrink fit sleeve as described by manufacturer, or carefully slit
open and remove.

Caution: Do not damage the insulation or wires inside the cable!

Use proper extraction tool - see paragraph 5.2 - insert from contact side parallel to the plug axis into the socket
or over the pin contact. Apply even pressure and push contacts out in direction of the cable.
Carefully pull extraction tool from plug, clean wire.

5.4. To wire contacts


Contact size Contact Wire diameter Adjustment - crimp tool
Stripping
type
length Color Crimp
AWG S=Socket mm AWG Dial. No
(mm) insert
P=Pin
P 5 gray
SS10 0,96 18 6,0+0,3
S 5 gray

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Wiring installation guidelines LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 ITT-Cannon plug Blatt


Page
Feuille
2.3.02.05
Depending on the number of poles, the minimum stripping length must be adhered to on covered cables.
No. of Min. stripping
poles length (mm)
2, 3, 4 40
5, 6, 7 45
8, 9, 10 50
Strip the wire to the length shown on chart and crimp - see paragraph 2.1 to 2.3

5.5. To install contacts


Note general guidelines described in paragraph 1.
Push shrink fit sleeve onto wires. Insert plug into installation tool, see paragraph 2.1.31 to facilitate this process.
Insert wired contact into the insertion tool, see paragraph 5.2,
keeping contact 1, cable 2 and tool 3 in a straight line and push until
tool shoulder touches contact..
On socket type contacts, add guide pin.
Dip parts into isopropyl alcohol and push into plug, see chart,
applying even pressure parallel to the length axis until it snaps in
place. Remove guide pin, pull tool carefully from plug and check if
wire is seated properly, by pulling slightly..
Remove plug from installation tool.
Check seating and position of contacts again. On the end of the cover, insert seal (Ray-Block), and push shrink
fit sleeve over plug. Evenly heat is with hot air fan until the Ray-Block is melted and the components are
covered tightly.
Caution: Do not pull on the wires during the shrink fit procedure. Do not overheat the connector..

6. Installation Guidelines DEUTSCH Plug Connector


General:
In machines, plug connections type Deutsch DT and Deutsch HDP Series are used - see the following overview
chart.
Plug Connector series DT

A = Socket B = Plug

Item listing:
1 Housing
2 Grommet
3 Locking wedge socket
4 Locking wedge plug
5 Seal plug
6 Pin
7 Socket
Plug Connector series HDP

A = Socket B = Plug

Item listing:

1 Socket housing with pin


2 Plug housing with socket
3 Grommet
4 Union nut

6.1. Overview chart


Number / Type of
contact - size Notes
Plug description Plug series Crimp tool for designations
S=Socket, P=Pins see group. 09

Deutsch plug 2-S Tool: M 22520/1-01


(2 pole)
DT
CT120090-20 Y14
2-P Insert:

Deutsch Plug 3-S Tool: M 22520/1-01


(3 pole)
DT
CT120090-20 B5, B6, X34(S2)
3-P Insert:

Deutsch Plug
(4 pole) 4-S Tool: M 22520/1-01 X69, X70, X71, X72,
DT
4-P Insert: CT120090-20 X77
Deutsch Plug
(6 pole) 6-S Tool: M 22520/1-01
DT
CT120090-20 X6, X7
6-P Insert:

Deutsch Plug
(8 pole) 8-S Tool: M 22520/1-01
DT
CT120090-20 X6, X/
8-P Turret:

Deutsch Plug
(12 pole) 12 - S Tool: M 22520/1-01
DT
CT120090-20 X65, X73
12 - P Insert:

Deutsch plug
(18 pole) 18 - S Tool: M 22520/1-01
HDP
CT120090-20 X64
18 - P Insert:

6.2. Wiring of contacts


contact size contact Wire diameter Adjustment - Crimp tool
Insulator
type
Length color crimping
AWG S=Jack mm AWG Dial No..
(mm) insert
P=pin
P
20 0,75 20 5,0 4 red
S
P
18 1,0 18 5,0 5 red
S
P
16 1,5 16 6,0 6 blue
S
P
12 2,5 12 6,0 8 gray
S
In case of repairs, crimp contacts >2,5 mm must be soldered on the central cable harness.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Wiring installation guidelines LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 ITT-Cannon plug Blatt


Page
Feuille
2.3.02.06
6.3. Crimping of contacts
See installation instructions, point 1 to 2.4

6.4. Installation of contacts DT Series:


Contacts must engage properly at installation (click). Installation is made without tools.
Inserted Engaged

After positioning the contacts, the locking wedge must be inserted, see illustration DT-Series.
Note: Insert the contacts straight, do not kink. Use Isopropyl alcohol (rubbing alcohol) .

6.5. Removal of contacts DT Series:


Remove the locking wedge and use a small screw driver to loosen the pin or bushing lock and pull the contact
with the cable from the housing .

6.6. Installation of contacts HDP Series:


Installation is made without tools.
Contacts must engage properly (click).
Inserted Engaged

Note: Insert the contacts straight, do not kink. Use Isopropyl alcohol (rubbing alcohol) .

6.7. Removal of contacts HDP Series:


To remove the contacts, use special tool, see section 02.1.31.

Select tool according to cable diameter and push over cable and pin
or bushing contact. Push the lock in to loosen and pull out the cable
together with contact and tool.

Loosen the lock Pull out


Directions for use of Four Notch Hand Crimping Tool
1. General:
Protect the pliers from contamination.
Do not open with force.
When crimping, push the tool together all the way before opening it again.
Use positioning sleeve for HAN D contacts, see section 02.1.31.

2. Four notch hand crimping tool, see section 02.1.31.


Parts list:
1 Pliers
2 Positioning sleeve
3 Locking bar
4 Lock screw
5 Adjustment scale
6 Adjustment screw

2.1. Attach the positioning sleeve


Loosen the lock screw 4 on the locking bar, pull the bar 3 back and insert the sleeve 2,
close the bar and retighten the lock screw 4.
Set the crimping depth.
Determine the diameter of the conductor and select the corresponding pin = crimping
depth.
For pin Id. No., see section 2.1.31.

Conductor Pin
mm AWG HAN D
0,50 20 1,55
0,75 18 1,55
1,00 18 1,55
1,38 16 1,60
1,50 16 1,80
2,10 14 1,45
2.50 14 1,55

Open and close the crimping tool several times and then hold in open position.
Turn the adjustment screw, pos.6 until the edge of the indicator bar aligns with the line of the selected pin
diameter.
Close the tool and check the setting with the pin.

If set correctly, the pin * must fit without a clearance into the existing tool opening.
Caution: When the pin is inserted, do not open or close the tool - danger of breaking
correct incorrect

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Wiring installation guidelines LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 01 Harting plug Blatt


Page 2.3.03.01
Feuille
2.2. Crimping
Before crimping, insulate the ends of the wire with a suitable tool - see section 02.1.31.
8 mm on 0.75 1.50 mm contacts
6 mm on 2.50 mm contacts
Note: The cable wires must be visible in the control bore.
All cable wires must be caught in the crimping point.
The insulation must reach the contact.

Insert the cable with the contact into the pre-set tool.
Push the tool together, quickly and all the way.
Pull the cable with the crimped contact from the tool and check the
crimping.
Note: The tool can only be opened when the cable is crimped
completely.

2.3. Installation of pin contacts - plug section on instrument


panel

Set the plug section, pos.1 into the instrument panel.


Set the pin contacts, pos.3 in to the contact base, pos.2. Screw
the base with the plug section, pos.1.

2.4. Installation of bushing contacts / plug section central wiring


harness
Push the shrink fit sleeve or shrink fit part over the cable before
installation of the contact base .
Push the clamping section, pos.5, rubber seal with washers,
pos.4, screw fitting, pos.3 and plug housing, pos.1 over the
cable.
For installation of contacts, use insertion tool, see section
02.1.31.
Insert the bushing contacts into the contact base, pos. 2, screw the base together with the housing, pos. 1.
Caution: The cables can be stuck / damaged when connecting. Screw the screw fitting, pos. 3 into the plug
housing and tighten. Insert the rubber seal with washers and attach wiring harness with clamping section on
the plug housing, pos. 1.
Note: Do not use damaged parts.
Make sure all parts are positioned correctly, check corresponding plug illustrations (see section
9.2).
Visually check the installation position of the contacts, route the cable free of tension.

2.5. Sealing
Push the shrink fit sleeve over the clamping section, pos.5 and push in the screw fitting, pos.3 and use a hot air
blower to heat evenly until the sleeve is shrunk in place.
Note: Do not heat the components of the screw connection above 125C ( 257F).

2.6. Removal of pin and bushing contacts


For removal, use removal tool, see section 02.1.31.
Push the removal tool over the pin or bushing and loosen the lock, push the contacts out.
Installation guidelines for MATE-N-LOK and JUNIOR POWER TIMER plug connectors
1. MATE-N-LOK
Design:
Plug with contact pin Socket with contact bushings

1.1. Use of hand crimping tool


Profile 1 Pos.2 Wire diameter 0.5 1.3 mm
Profile 2 Pos.3 Wire diameter 1.3 2.1 mm

Open the pliers, pos.1 all the way to insert the contact, which is to be crimped (note the
correct profile) and slowly push the pliers together until the contact is lightly clamped on
the crimping sleeve.
Insert the wire, which is to be insulated (insulation length 5 mm).
Push the pliers all the way together.
Pull the crimped contact from the pliers and check the crimping.

Contact pin with crimped wire Contact bushing with crimped wire

* = Contact notch

1.2. Installation of contacts


Installation is made without tools.
Note: Check contact notches before installation for damage or breaks.
Contacts must audibly click when engaging in the housing.

1.3. Removal of contacts


To remove the contacts, use special tool, see section 02.1.31.
Use:
Push the tool, pos.2 over the pin or bushing contact and push the
contact notches together, pull the contact on the cable from
housing, pos. 1 .

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Wiring installation guidelines LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 01 AMP plug Blatt


Page 2.3.04.01
Feuille
2. JUNIOR POWER TIMER
Design:
Plug with contact pins Socket with contact bushings

2.1. Use of hand crimping tool

Mark:
Red for cable diameter 0.25 - 1.60 mm
Blue for cable diameter 1.00 - 2.60 mm
Yellow for cable diameter 2.70 - 6.60 mm

Open the pliers all the way to insert the contact, which is to be crimped with the seal and slowly push the pliers
together until the contact is lightly clamped on the crimping sleeve.
Insert the wire, which is to be insulated (insulation length 5 mm).
Push the pliers all the way together.

Pull the crimped contact 1 from the pliers.


Check the crimping with seal 2.

2.2. Installation of contacts


Installation is made without tools.
Note: Check contact notches before installation for damage or breaks.
Contacts must audibly click when engaging in the housing.

2.3. Removal of contacts


To remove the contacts, use special tool, see section 02.1.31.
Use:

Push the tool, pos.2 over the pin or bushing contact and push the
contact notches together, pull the contact on the cable from housing,
pos. 1.
Sub Group Index
Technical data 3.1

PR 712 F/N xxx-01030500 3.1.10


PR 712B F/N xxx-05012999 3.1.11
PR 712B F/N xxx-30003083 3.1.12
PR 712B F/N xxx-30845599 3.1.13
PR 712B F/N xxx-5600 3.1.14

PR 722 F/N xxx-01031000 3.1.20


PR 722B F/N xxx-10013000 3.1.21
PR 722B F/N xxx-30013170 3.1.22
PR 722B F/N xxx-31715599 3.1.23
PR 722B F/N xxx-5600 3.1.24

PR 732 F/N xxx-20032500 3.1.30


PR 732B F/N xxx-25012999 3.1.31
PR 732B F/N xxx-30003135 3.1.32
PR 732B F/N xxx-31365599 3.1.33
PR 732B F/N xxx-5600 3.1.34

PR 742 F/N xxx-20012500 3.1.40


PR 742B F/N xxx-25012999 3.1.41
PR 742B F/N xxx-30003088 3.1.42
PR 742B F/N xxx-30895233 3.1.43
PR 742B F/N xxx-52345599 3.1.44
PR 742B F/N xxx-5600 3.1.45

PR 752 F/N xxx-20025599 3.1.50


PR 752 F/N xxx-56006199 3.1.51
PR 752 F/N xxx-6200 3.1.52

Maintenance and inspection guidelines 3.2

PR 712 F/N xxx-01010500 3.2.10


PR 722 F/N xxx-01011000
PR 732 F/N xxx-20012500
PR 742 F/N xxx-20012500

PR 712B F/N xxx-05012999 3.2.11


PR 722B F/N xxx-10012999
PR 732B F/N xxx-25012999
PR 742B F/N xxx-25012999

PR 712B F/N xxx- 3000 3.2.12


PR 722B F/N xxx- 3000
PR 732B F/N xxx-30003039
PR 742B F/N xxx-30003024
PR 752 F/N xxx-20022008

PR 712B F/N xxx-30013083 3.2.13


PR 722B F/N xxx-30013170
PR 732B F/N xxx-30403135
PR 742B F/N xxx-30253088
PR 752 F/N xxx-20092059

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Technical Data -
Datum Edition Date

01 03 Maintenance Guidelines Blatt


Page 3.0.00.01
Feuille
PR 712B F/N xxx-30845599 3.2.14
PR 722B F/N xxx-31715599
PR 732B F/N xxx-31365599
PR 742B F/N xxx-30895599
PR 752 F/N xxx-20605599

PR 712B F/N xxx-5600 3.2.15


PR 722B F/N xxx-5600
PR 732B F/N xxx-5600
PR 742B F/N xxx-5600
PR 752 F/N xxx-5600

Maintenance and inspection instructions 3.4

Adjustment checklist and quick reference 3.5

PR 712 F/N xxx-01030384 3.5.00


PR 722 F/N xxx-01030563
PR 732 F/N xxx-20032500
PR 742 F/N xxx-20012500

PR 712(B) F/N xxx-03855599 3.5.01


PR 722(B) F/N xxx-05645599
PR 732B F/N xxx-25015599
PR 742B F/N xxx-25015599

PR 712B F/N xxx-56006199 3.5.02


PR 722B F/N xxx-56006199
PR 732B F/N xxx-56006199
PR 742B F/N xxx-56006199

PR 712B F/N xxx-6200 3.5.03


PR 722B F/N xxx-6200
PR 732B F/N xxx-6200
PR 742B F/N xxx-6200

PR 752 F/N xxx-20025599 3.5.50

PR 752 F/N xxx-56006199 3.5.51

PR 752 F/N xxx-6200 3.5.52


PR 712 > 103 L > 103 M>103
Type No. 348 415 349

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 904 TB LIEBHERR
Engine version in line 4 > mildly turbocharged
Rating to DIN 6271 kW 74 (98.6 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 2000
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
High idle RPM 1/min 2100+80
Displacement l (cu. in) 5.6 (342)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 18 (19)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3
Max. machine inclination > all directions 45 = 100 %
Valve clearance > cold intake/ / exhaust mm 0.20 / 0.25
Firing order 1>3>4>2
Coolant capacity l (gal) 52 (13)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 310 (82)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 11 > 18 (2.9 > 4.75)

SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 266
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,803
Oil quantity l (qt) 2.5 (2.65)
Oil specifications see lube oil group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2BPV 50
max. flow> Q max. l/min (gal/min) 2 125 (33)
max. operating pressure bar 420
Gear pump > repl. circuit type BOSCH 0510
max. flow Q max. l/min (gal/min) 79 (21)
max. operating pressure (Sp) bar 16+4
Travel motors type 2BMV 105

Variable flow working hydraulic pump > type A 10 V 045


max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 112 (29.6)
stand by pressure (HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) bar 160
Servo > operating pressure > working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 / 157 * (47 / 41 *)


> + circuit capacity l (gal) 53 (14)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Batteries 212 V 110 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 5.4
Automatic circuit breaker A 60
Fuses A see Operation and Maintenance Manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 400 / 523
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/a partir de


PR 712 F/N xxx> 0103 0500

Datum Edition Date


Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.10.01
PR 712 >103 L > 103 M > 103
Type No. 348 415 349
TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 46,5
Oil quantity l (qt) 24.5 (4,8)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 171.5 (6.7) 171.5 (6.7) 171.5 (6.7)
Track chain length links 42 44 44
Track pad width (single grouser) mm 457 / 560 457/560/610/711 610/711/762/864
Track pad bolts thread. size 5/8 UNF 5/8UNF 5/8 UNF
Track rollers > single flange (s) qty. 4 4 4
Track rollers > double flange (d) qty. 2 3 3
Track roller location s>d>s>s>d>s s>d>s>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>s>d>s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2 2
Max. roller frame oscillation +/> 2.5 +/> 2.5 +/> 2.5

ATTACHMENT
Lift cylinder bearing > lube oil quantity l (qt) 0.50 (0.52)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group1.3

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1100


6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 850 90/50/1100 90/50/850

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 90


6 > way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 110 / 50 / 150

Angle cylinder 6 > way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 110 / 50 / 275

Ripper cylinder > cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 450

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 11 (0 > 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 4,6 (0 > 2.8)
Basic machine: height over cab mm 3100
overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 3675
overall length with straight blade mm 4475 4665 4645
overall length with 6>way blade (straight) mm 4810 4835 4810
overall length with 6>way blade (angled) mm 5255 5335 5360
track gauge (+1width of 1 pad=total width) mm 1630 1750 1930
ground clearance mm 370 370 370
11550 / 11800/12000/ >>>>>>/12450/
Operating weight w. straight blade (varies due to pad width ) kg
11750 12100/12300 12600/12800
Operating weight w. 6>way blade (varies due to pad width) kg 11500 / >>>>> 11850/12050/>>>>> 12200/12300/12500
Straight blade: blade width mm 2750 3000 3350
blade capacity m3 1,96 2,14 2,08
weight > attachment complete kg 1200 1270 1300
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0,51 /0,43 0.49/0.41/0.38/0.33 >>>/0.33/0.32/0.28
6>way blade: blade width mm 2650 2950 3235
width (angled) mm 2440 2750 3000
blade capacity m3 1,78 2,42 2,20
weight > attachment complete kg 1160 1270 1250
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.51 / >>>> 0.50/0.42/>>>> 0.38/0.33/0.31
Ripper: add. length ripper lowered mm 1185
add. length ripper raised mm 925
weight > ripper complete kg 850
max. slope angle 31
Winch: additional length mm 635
weight kg 800
max. slope angle 25
height cable exit mm 1130
height drawbar pull mm 515
max. line pull kN (t) 228 (23,2)
max. line speed m/min 0 > 78 infinitely variable
cable size a mm 19
max. length m 70
*) PR 712 / 103 > 113, M/103>109
PR 712 B >F/N 348 > B L >F/N 415 > B M >F/N 349 >
05012999 05012999 05012999

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 904 TB LIEBHERR
Engine version in line 4 > mildly turbocharged
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 77 (103 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 2000
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
High idle RPM 1/min 2100+80
Displacement l (cu.in) 5,6 (342)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 18 (19)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3
Max. machine inclination > all directions 45 = 100 %
Valve clearance > cold intake/exhaust mm 0.20 / 0.25
Firing order 1>3>4>2
Coolant capacity l (gal) 42 (11,1)
Fuel tank > capacity l (gal) 310 ( 81,8)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 11 > 18 (2.9 > 4.7)

SPLITTERBOX
Type 250 B 266
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,803
Oil quantity l (qt) 2,5 (2.65)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2BPV 50
max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 2125 (33)
max. operating pressure > p max. bar 420
Gear pump > repl. circuit type BOSCH 0510
max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 79 (20,8)
max. operating pressure (Sp) > p max. bar 16+4
Travel motors type 2BMV 105

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A10V045


max. flow > Q max. l /min (gal/min) 112 (29,5)
standby pressure (HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) > p max. bar 160
Servo > operating pressure > working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


> + circuit capacity l (gal) 53 (14)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Batteries 212 V 110 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 5.4
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see Operation and Maintenance Manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 400 P 553
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx> 0501 2999

Datum Edition Date


Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.11.01
PR 712 B >F/N 348 > B L >F/N 415 > B M >F/N 349 >
05012999 05012999 05012999

TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 45.4 :1
Oil quantity l (qt) 210 (10.6)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 171,5 ( 6,7) 171,5 ( 6,7) 171,5 ( 6,7)
Track chain length links 42 44 44
Track pad width (single grouser) mm 457/560 457/560/610/711 762/864
Track pad bolts thread. size 5/8 UNF 5/8UNF 5/8 UNF
Track rollers > single flange (s) qty. 4 4 4
Track rollers > double flange (d) qty. 2 3 3
Track roller location s>d>s>s>d>s s>d>s>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>s>d>s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2 2
Max. roller frame oscillation +/> 2.5 +/> 2.5 +/> 2.5

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1100


6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 850 90/50/1100 90/50/850

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 90


6 > way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 110 / 50 / 150

Angle cylinder 6 > way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 110 / 50 / 275

Ripper cylinder > cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 450

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 11 (0 > 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 4.6 (0 > 2.8)
Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 146
Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 740

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3100


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 3675
overall length with straight blade mm 4485 4665 4645
overall length with 6>way blade (straight) mm 4835 4810
overall length with 6>way blade (angled) mm 5335 5360
track gauge (+1width of 1 pad=total width) mm 1630 1750 1930
ground clearance mm 370 370 370
11550 / 11750 11800/12000/ 12600/12800
Operating weight w. straight blade (varies due to pad width ) kg
12100/12300
Operating weight w. 6>way blade (varies due to pad width) kg 11850/12050/>>>>> 12300/12500

Straight blade: blade width mm 2750 3000 3350


blade capacity m3 2.18 2.14 2.15
weight > attachment complete kg 1200 1270 1300
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0,51 /0,43 0.49/0.41/0.38/0.33 0.32/0.28
6>way blade: blade width mm 2950 3235
width (angled) mm 2750 3000
blade capacity m3 2.42 2.20
weight > attachment complete kg 1270 1250
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.50/0.42/>>>>> 0.33/0.31
Ripper (3): add. length ripper lowered mm 1185
add. length ripper raised mm 925
weight > ripper complete kg 850
max. slope angle 31
Winch: additional length mm 635
weight kg 1200
height drawbar pull mm 525
max. line pull kN (t) 227 (23.1)
max. line speed m/min 0 > 105 infinitely variable
cable size a mm 19
max. length m 70
PR 712 B >F/N 348 > B L >F/N 415 > B M >F/N 349 >
30013083 30013083 30013083

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 924 T>E A1
Engine version in line 4 > turbo charged
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 77 (103 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 2000
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
High idle RPM 1/min 2100+80
Displacement l (cu.in) 6,64 (405,2)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 18 (19)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3
Max. machine inclination > all directions 45 = 100 %
Valve clearance > cold intake/exhaust mm 0.25 / 0.30
Firing order 1>3>4>2
Coolant capacity /DCA 4 l (gal) 52 (13.7)/2 (0.5)
Fuel tank > capacity l (gal) 310 (81,8)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 10 > 17 (2.6 > 4.5)

SPLITTERBOX
Type 250 B 266
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,803
Oil quantity l (qt) 2.5 (2.65)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2BPV 50
max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 2125 (33)
max. operating pressure > p max. bar 420
Gear pump > repl. circuit type BOSCH 0510
max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 79 (20,8)
max. operating pressure (Sp) > p max. bar 16+4
Travel motors type 2BMV 105

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A10V045


max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 112 (29,5)
standby pressure (HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) > p max. bar 160
Servo > operating pressure > working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


> + circuit capacity l (gal) 53 (14)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Batteries 212 V 110 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 5,4
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see Operation and Maintenance Manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 400 P 553
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx>30013083

Datum Edition Date


Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.12.01
PR 712 B >F/N 348 > B L >F/N 415 > B M >F/N 349 >
30013083 30013083 30013083

TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 45,4 :1
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 10 (2.75)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 171.5 ( 6.7) 171.5 ( 6.7) 171.5 ( 6.7)
Track chain length links 42 44 44
Track pad width (single grouser) mm 457 / 560 457/560/610/660 762/864
Track pad bolts thread. size 5/8 UNF 5/8UNF 5/8 UNF
Track rollers > single flange (s) qty. 4 4 4
Track rollers > double flange (d) qty. 2 3 3
Track roller location s>d>s>s>d>s s>d>s>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>s>d>s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2 2
Max. roller frame oscillation +/> 2.5 +/> 2.5 +/> 2.5

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1100


6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 850 90/50/1100 90/50/850

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 90


6 > way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 110 / 50 / 150

Angle cylinder 6 > way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 110 / 50 / 275

Ripper cylinder > cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 450

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 11 ( 0> 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 4.6 (0> 2.8)
Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 146
Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 740

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3100


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 3675
overall length with straight blade mm 4485 4665 4645
overall length with 6>way blade (straight) mm 4835 4810
overall length with 6>way blade (angled) mm 5335 5360
track gauge (+1width of 1 pad=total width) mm 1630 1750 1930
ground clearance mm 370 370 370

11550 / 11750 11800/12000/ 12600/12800


Operating weight w. straight blade (varies due to pad width ) kg
12100/12300
Operating weight w. 6>way blade (varies due to pad width) kg 11850/12050/>>>>> 12300/12500

Straight blade: blade width mm 2750 3000 3350


blade capacity m3 2.18 2.14 2.15
weight > attachment complete kg 1200 1270 1300
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.51 /0.43 0.49/0.41/0.38/0.33 0.32/0.28
6>way blade: blade width mm 2950 3235
width (angled) mm 2750 3000
blade capacity m3 2,42 2,20
weight > attachment complete kg 1270 1250
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.50/0.42/>>>>> 0.33/0.31
Ripper (3): add. length ripper lowered mm 1185
add. length ripper raised mm 925
weight > ripper complete kg 850
max. slope angle 31
Winch: additional length mm 635
weight kg 1200
height drawbar pull mm 525
max. line pull kN (t) 227 (23,1)
max. line speed m/min 0 > 105 infinitely variable
cable size a mm 19
max. length m 70
PR 712 B - F/N 348 - BL - F/N 415 - BM - F/N 349 -
30845599 30845599 30845599

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 924 T - E A1
Construction 4 cylinder in line - turbocharged
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 77 (103 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 2000
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
+80
High idle RPM 1/min 2100
Displacement l (cu. in) 6,64 (405,2)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 18 (19)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance - cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 52 / 2 (13,7 / 0,5)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 310 (81,8)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 10 - 17 (2,6 - 4,5)

SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 266
Construction 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,803
Oil quantity l (qt) 2,5 (2,65)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x BPV 50
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 125 (33)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Gear pump - repl. circuit type BOSCH 0510
max flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 79 (20,8)
+4
max operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 16
Travel motors type 2 x BMV 105

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A 10 V 045


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 112 (29,5)
stand by pressure(HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 160
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 53 (14)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Battery 2 x 12 V, 110 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 5,4
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see operation and maintenance manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 450 D 583
Construction 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
Ratio i total 45,4 : 1
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx-3084 5599
Mjfcifss!

Datum Edition Date

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.13.01
Feuille
PR 712 B - F/N 348 - BL - F/N 415 - BM - F/N 349 -
30845599 30845599 30845599

TRAVEL GEAR
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 5,5 (5,8)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm / inch 171,5 / 6,7
Track chain length links 42 44
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 457 / 560 457 /560 /610 /660 762 / 864
Track pad bolts thread. size 5/8 UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty. 4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty. 2 3
Track roller location s-d-s-s-d-s s-d-s-d- s-d-s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 2,5

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1100


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 850 90 / 50 / 1100 90 / 50 / 850

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 90


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 110 / 50 / 150

Angle cylinder 6-way blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 110 / 50 / 275

Ripper cylinder - cyl. / rod / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 450

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 11 (0 - 6,8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 4,6 (0 - 2,8)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 146


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 740

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3100


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 3675
overall length with straight blade mm 4485 4665 4645
overall length with 6-way-blade (straight) mm 4835 4810
overall length with 6-way-blade (angled) mm 5335 5360
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1630 1750 1930
ground clearance mm 370

11800 / 12000 /
Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 11550 / 11750 12600 / 12800
12100 / 12300
Operating weight w. 6-way-blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 11850 / 12050 / --- 12300 / 12500

Straight blade: blade width mm 2750 3000 3350


3
blade capacity m 2,18 2,14 2,15
weight - attachment complete kg 1200 1270 1300
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,51 / 0,43 0,49/0,41/0,38/0,33 0,32 / 0,28
6-way-blade: blade width mm 2950 3235
width (angled) mm 2750 3000
3
blade capacity m 2,42 2,20
weight - attachment complete kg 1270 1250
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,50 / 0,42 / --- 0,33 / 0,31
Ripper(3): length add.(lowered) mm 1185
length add.(raised) mm 925
weight kg 850
slope angle 31
Winch additional length mm 635
weight kg 1200
height drawbar pull mm 525
max. line pull kN 227 (23,1t)
max. line speed m/min 0-105 infinitely variable
cable size mm 19
max. length m 70
PR 712 B - F/N 348 - BL - F/N 415 - BM - F/N 349 -
5600 5600 5600

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 924 T - E A1
Construction 4 cylinder in line - turbocharged
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 77 (103 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 2000
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
+80
High idle RPM 1/min 2100
Displacement l (cu. in) 6,64 (405,2)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 22,5 (23,7)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance - cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 52 / 2 (13,7 - 0,5)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 310 (81,8)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 10 - 17 (2,6 - 4,5)

SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 266
Construction 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,803
Oil quantity l (qt) 2,5 (2,65)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x BPV 50
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 125 (33)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Tandem gear pump - replenishing / fan drive type 32 ZP + 16 ZP
max. flow replenishing - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 79 (20,8)
+4
max. operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 16
max. flow fan drive - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 39 (10,3)
+10
max. operating pressure (electronic regulated) pmax bar 110
Gear motor - fan drive type ZM 0511
+100
operation RPM 1/min 1850
Travel motors type 2 x BMV 105

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A 10 V 045


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 112 (29,5)
stand by pressure(HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 160
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 53 (14)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Battery 2 x 12 V, 110 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 5,4
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see operation and maintenance manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 450 D 583
Construction 2 stage planetary gear
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx-5600
Mjfcifss!

Datum Edition Date

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.14.01
Feuille
PR 712 B - F/N 348 - BL - F/N 415 - BM - F/N 349 -
5600 5600 5600

TRAVEL GEAR
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
Ratio i total 45,4 : 1
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 5,5 (5,8)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm / inch 171,5 / 6,7
Track chain length links 42 44
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 457 / 560 457 /560 /610 /660 762 / 864
Track pad bolts thread. size 5/8 UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty. 4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty. 2 3
Track roller location s-d-s-s-d-s s-d-s-d- s-d-s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 2,5

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1100


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 850 90 / 50 / 1100 90 / 50 / 850

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 90


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 110 / 50 / 150

Angle cylinder 6-way blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 110 / 50 / 275

Ripper cylinder - cyl. / rod / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 450

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 11 (0 - 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 4,6 (0 - 2.8)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 146


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 740

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3100


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 3675
overall length with straight blade mm 4485 4665 4645
overall length with 6-way-blade (straight) mm 4835 4810
overall length with 6-way-blade (angled) mm 5335 5360
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1630 1750 1930
ground clearance mm 370

11800 / 12000 /
Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 11550 / 11750 12600 / 12800
12100 / 12300
Operating weight w. 6-way-blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 11850 / 12050 / --- 12300 / 12500

Straight blade: blade width mm 2750 3000 3350


3
blade capacity m 2,18 2,14 2,15
weight - attachment complete kg 1200 1270 1300
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,51 / 0,43 0,49/0,41/0,38/0,33 0,32 / 0,28
6-way-blade: blade width mm 2950 3235
width (angled) mm 2750 3000
3
blade capacity m 2,42 2,20
weight - attachment complete kg 1270 1250
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,50 / 0,42 / --- 0,33 / 0,31
Ripper(3): length add.(lowered) mm 1185
length add.(raised) mm 925
weight kg 850
slope angle 31
Winch additional length mm 635
weight kg 1200
height drawbar pull mm 525
max. line pull kN 227 (23,1t)
max. line speed m/min 0-105 infinitely variable
cable size mm 19
max. length m 70
PR 722 > 103 L>101 M > 103
Type No. 281 397 347
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 904 T LIEBHERR
Engine version in line 4 > turbocharged
Rating to DIN 6271 kW 94 (126 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 2000
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
High idle RPM 1/min 2100+80
Displacement l (cu. in) 5.6 (342)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 18 (19)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3
Max. machine inclination > all directions 45 = 100 %
Valve clearance > cold intake / exhaust mm 0.20 / 0.25
Firing order 1>3>4>2
Coolant capacity l (gal) 52 (13)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 310 (82)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 14 > 22 (3.7 > 5.8)

SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 265
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,914
Oil quantity l (qt) 2.5 (2.65)
Oil specifications see lube oil group. 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2BPV 70
max. flow > Q max. l /min (gal/min) 2154 (40)
max. operating pressure bar 420
Gear pump > repl. circuit type BOSCH 0510
max. flow Q max. l /min (gal/min) 83 (22)
max. operating pressure (Sp) bar 16+4
Travel motors type 2BMV 135

Variable flow working hydraulic pump > type A10V071


max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 156 (41.2)
stand by pressure (HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) bar 160
Servo > operating pressure > working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178/ 157* (47/ 41*)


> +circuit capacity l (gal) 53 (14)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Batteries 212 V 110 AH (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 5.4
Automatic circuit breaker A 60
Fuses A see Operation and Maintenance Manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 450 / 514
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/a partir de

PR 722 F/N xxx> 0103 1000

Datum Edition Date


Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.20.01
PR 722 >103 L>101 M > 103
Type No. 281 397 347
TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 42,9
Oil quantity l (qt) 26 (6,4)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm(inch) 175,5 (6,9) 175,5 (6,9) 175,5 (6,9)
Track chain length links 43 47 47
Track pad width (single grouser) mm 508 / 610 508 / 610 711 / 812 / 914
Track pad bolts thread. size 5/8 UNF 5/8 UNF 5/8 UNF
Track rollers > single flange (s) qty. 4 4 4
Track rollers > double flange (d) qty. 3 4 4
Track roller location s>d>s>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>d>s>d>s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2 2
Max. roller frame oscillation +/> 2.5 +/>2.5 +/> 2.5

ATTACHMENT
Lift cylinder bearing > lube oil quantity l (qt) 0.50 (0.52)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group. 1.3

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1140 90 / 50 / 1030 90 / 50 / 1030
6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 850

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 100


6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 170

Angle cylinder 6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 325

Ripper cylinder > cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 450

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 11 (0 > 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 4,6 (0 > 2.8)
Basic machine: height over cab mm 3105
overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 3890 3910 3910
overall length with straight blade mm 4695 5045 5045
overall length with 6>way blade (straight) mm 4890 5190 5190
overall length with 6>way blade (angled) mm 5480 5780 5895
track gauge (+1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1800 1800 2084
ground clearance mm 365 365 365
Operating weight w. straight blade (varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13740 / 13980 14400 /14600 /14850
Operating weight w. 6>way blade (varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13795 / 14035 14300 /14550 /14800
Straight blade: blade width mm 3000 3000 3600
blade capacity m3 2.85 2.85 3.13
weight > attachment complete kg 1650 1650 1800
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.51 / 0.43 0.46 / 0.39 0.35 / 0.31 / 0.28
6>way blade: blade width mm 3200 3200 3790
width (angled) mm 2950 2950 3490
blade capacity m3 2,59 2,59 3,11
weight > attachment complete kg 1575 1575 1770
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.51 / 0.43 0.46 / 0.39 0.34 / 0.31 / 0.28
Ripper: add. length ripper lowered mm 1235
add. length ripper raised mm 945
weight > ripper complete kg 1100
max. slope angle 30
Winch: additional length mm 635
weight kg 900
max. slope angle 25
height cable exit 1135
height drawbar pull mm 520
max. line pull kN (t) 283 (28,3)
max. line speed m/min 0 > 88 infinitely variable
cable size a mm 22
max. length m 65

*) PR 722/103>108, M/103>112
PR 722 B >F/N 281 > B L >F/N 397 > B M >F/N 347
10013000 10013000 10013000

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 904 T LIEBHERR
Engine version in line 4 > turbocharged
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 97 (130 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 2000
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
High idle RPM 1/min 2100+80
Displacement l (cu. in) 5,6 (342)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 18 (19)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3
Max. machine inclination > all directions 45 = 100 %
Valve clearance > cold intake / exhaust mm 0.20 / 0.25
Firing order 1>3>4>2
Coolant capacity l (gal) 42 (11)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 310 (82)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 14 > 22 (3.7 > 5.8)

SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 265
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,914
Oil quantity l (qt) 2.5 (2.65)
Oil specifications see lube oil group. 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2BPV 70
max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 2154 (40)
max. operating pressure bar 420
Gear pump > repl. circuit type BOSCH 0510
max. flow Q max. l/min (gal/min) 83 (22)
max. operating pressure (Sp) bar 16+4
Travel motors type 2BMV 135

Variable flow working hydraulic pump > type A10V071


max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 156 (40.2)
stand by pressure (HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) bar 160
Servo > operating pressure > working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


> +circuit capacity l (gal) 53 (14)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Batteries 212 V 110 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 5.4
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see Operation and Maintenance Manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 450 P 554
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/a partir de

PR 722 B F/N xxx> 1001 3000

Datum Edition Date


Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.21.01
PR 722 B >F/N 281 > B L >F/N 397 > B M >F/N 347>
10013000 10013000 10013000

TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 41.7 :1
Oil quantity l (qt) 213 (13.7)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 175,5 ( 6,9) 175,5 ( 6,9) 175,5 (6,9)
Track chain length links 43 47 47
Track pad width (single grouser) mm 508 / 610 508 / 610 711 / 812 / 914
Track pad bolts thread. size 5/8 UNF 5/8 UNF 5/8 UNF
Track rollers > single flange (s) qty. 4 4 4
Track rollers > double flange (d) qty. 3 4 4
Track roller location s>d>s>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>d>s>d>s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2 2
Max. roller frame oscillation +/> 2.5 +/>2.5 +/> 2.5

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1140 90 / 50 / 1030 90 / 50 / 1030
6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 850

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 100


6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 170

Angle cylinder 6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 325

Ripper cylinder > cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 450

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 11 (0 > 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 4.6 (0 > 2.8)
Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 171
Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 750

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3105


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 3890 3910 3910
overall length with straight blade mm 4695 5045 5045
overall length with 6>way blade (straight) mm 5220 5190
overall length with 6>way blade (angled) mm 5805 5895
track gauge (+1width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1800 1800 2084
ground clearance mm 370 370 370

Operating weight w. straight blade (varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13740 /14000 14400 /14600 /14850
Operating weight w. 6>way blade (varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13795 / 14035 14300 /14550 /14800

Straight blade: blade width mm 3000 3000 3600


blade capacity m3 2,85 2,85 3,13
weight > attachment complete kg 1650 1650 1800
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.51 / 0.43 0.46 / 0.39 0.35 / 0.31 / 0.28
6>way blade: blade width mm 3200 3790
width (angled) mm 3490 3490
blade capacity m3 2,59 3,11
weight > attachment complete kg 1575 1770
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.46 / 0.39 0.34 / 0.31 / 0.28
Ripper (3): add. length ripper lowered mm 1235
add. length ripper raised mm 945
weight > ripper complete kg 1100
max. slope angle 30
Winch: additional length mm 635
weight kg 1200
height drawbar pull mm 530
max. line pull kN (t) 300 (30,6)
max. line speed m/min 0 > 96 infinitely variable
cable size a mm 22
max. length m 50
PR 722 B >F/N 281 > B L >F/N 397 > B M >F/N 347
30013170 30013170 30013170

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 924 T>E A1
Engine version in line 4 > turbocharged
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 97 (130 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 2000
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
High idle RPM 1/min 2100+80
Displacement l (cu. in) 6.64 (405.2 )
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 18 (19)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3
Max. machine inclination > all directions 45 = 100 %
Valve clearance > cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1>3>4>2
Coolant capacity /DCA 4 l (gal) 52/2 (13.7/0.5)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 310 (82)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 12 > 21 (3.2 > 5.5)

SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 265
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,914
Oil quantity l (qt) 2.5 (2.65)
Oil specifications see lube oil group. 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2BPV 70
max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 2154 (40)
max. operating pressure bar 420
Gear pump > repl. circuit type BOSCH 0510
max. flow Q max. l/min (gal/min) 83 (22)
max. operating pressure (Sp) bar 16+4
Travel motors type 2BMV 135

Variable flow working hydraulic pump > type A10V071


max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 156 (41.2)
stand by pressure (HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) bar 160
Servo > operating pressure > working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


> +circuit capacity l (gal) 53 (14)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Batteries 212 V 110 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 5,4
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see Operation and Maintenance Manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 450 P 554
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/a partir de

PR 722 B F/N xxx>30013170

Datum Edition Date


Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.22.01
PR 722 B >F/N 281 > B L >F/N 397 > B M >F/N 347>
30013170 30013170 30013170

TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 41.7 :1
Oil quantity l (qt) 213 (13.75)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 175.5 (6.9) 175.5 (6.9) 175.5 (6.9)
Track chain length links 43 47 47
Track pad width (single grouser) mm 508 / 610 508 / 610 711 / 812 / 914
Track pad bolts thread. size 5/8 UNF 5/8 UNF 5/8 UNF
Track rollers > single flange (s) qty. 4 4 4
Track rollers > double flange (d) qty. 3 4 4
Track roller location s>d>s>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>d>s>d>s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2 2
Max. roller frame oscillation +/> 2.5 +/>2.5 +/> 2.5

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1140 90 / 50 / 1030 90 / 50 / 1030
6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 850

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 100


6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 170

Angle cylinder 6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 325

Ripper cylinder > cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 450

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 11 (0 > 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 4.6 (0 > 2.8)
Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 171
Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 750

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3105


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 3890 3910 3910
overall length with straight blade mm 4695 5045 5045
overall length with 6>way blade (straight) mm 5220 5190
overall length with 6>way blade (angled) mm 5805 5895
track gauge (+1width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1800 1800 2084
ground clearance mm 370 370 370

Operating weight w. straight blade (varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13740 /14000 14400 /14600 /14850
Operating weight w. 6>way blade (varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13795 / 14035 14300 /14550 /14800

Straight blade: blade width mm 3000 3000 3600


blade capacity m3 2.85 2.85 3.13
weight > attachment complete kg 1650 1650 1800
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.51 / 0.43 0.46 / 0.39 0.35 / 0.31 / 0.28
6>way blade: blade width mm 3200 3790
width (angled) mm 3490 3490
blade capacity m3 2,59 3,11
weight > attachment complete kg 1575 1770
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.46 / 0.39 0.34 / 0.31 / 0.28
Ripper (3): add. length ripper lowered mm 1235
add. length ripper raised mm 945
weight > ripper complete kg 1100
max. slope angle 30
Winch: additional length mm 635
weight kg 1200
height drawbar pull mm 530
max. line pull kN (t) 300 (30,6)
max. line speed m/min 0 > 96 infinitely variable
cable size a mm 22
max. length m 50
PR 722 B - F/N 281 - BL - F/N 397 - BM - F/N 347 -
31715599 31715599 31715599

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 924 T - E A1
Construction 4 cylinder in line - turbocharged
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 97 (130 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 2000
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
+80
High idle RPM 1/min 2100
Displacement l (cu. in) 6,64 (405,2)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 18 (19)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance - cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 52 / 2 (13,7 / 0,5)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 310 (82)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 12 - 21 (3,2 - 5,5)

SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 265
Construction 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,914
Oil quantity l (qt) 2,5 (2,65)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x BPV 70
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 154 (40)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Gear pump - repl. circuit type BOSCH 0510
max flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 83 (22)
+4
max operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 16
Travel motors type 2 x BMV 135

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A 10 V 071


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 156 (41,2)
stand by pressure(HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 160
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 53 (14)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Battery 2 x 12 V, 110 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 5,4
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see operation and maintenance manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 450 D 584
Construction 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
Ratio i total 41,7 : 1
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx-3171 5599

Datum Edition Date

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.23.01
Feuille
PR 722 B - F/N 281 - BL - F/N 397 - BM - F/N 347 -
31715599 31715599 31715599

TRAVEL GEAR
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 8,5 (8,9)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm / inch 175,5 / 6,9
Track chain length links 43 47
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 711 / 812 / 914
Track pad bolts thread. size 5/8 UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty. 4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty. 3 4
Track roller location s-d-s-d-s-d-s s-d-s-d-d-s-d-s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 2,5

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1140 90 / 50 / 1030


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 850

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 100


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 170

Angle cylinder 6-way blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 325

Ripper cylinder - cyl. / rod / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 450

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 11 (0 - 6,8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 4,6 (0 - 2,8)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 171


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 750

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3105


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 3890 3910
overall length with straight blade mm 4695 5045
overall length with 6-way-blade (straight) mm 5220 5190
overall length with 6-way-blade (angled) mm 5805 5895
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1800 2084
ground clearance mm 370

Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13740 / 14000 14400/14600/14850
Operating weight w. 6-way-blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13795 / 14035 14300/14550/14800

Straight blade: blade width mm 3000 3600


3
blade capacity m 2,85 3,13
weight - attachment complete kg 1650 1800
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,51 / 0,43 0,46 / 0,39 0,35 / 0,31 / 0,28
6-way-blade: blade width mm 3200 3790
width (angled) mm 3490 3490
blade capacity m3 2,59 3,11
weight - attachment complete kg 1575 1770
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,46 / 0,39 0,34 / 0,31 / 0,28
Ripper(3): length add.(lowered) mm 1235
length add.(raised) mm 945
weight kg 1100
slope angle 30
Winch additional length mm 635
weight kg 1200
height drawbar pull mm 530
max. line pull kN 300 (30,6t)
max. line speed m/min 0-96 infinitely variable
cable size mm 22
max. length m 50
PR 722 B - F/N 281 - BL - F/N 397 - BM - F/N 347 -
5600 5600 5600

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 924 T - E A1
Construction 4 cylinder in line - turbocharged
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 97 (130 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 2000
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
+80
High idle RPM 1/min 2100
Displacement l (cu. in) 6,64 (405,2)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 22,5 (23,7)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance - cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 52 / 2 (13,7 / 0,5)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 310 (82)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 12 - 21 (3,2 - 5,5)

SPLITTER BOX
Type 250 B 265
Construction 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,914
Oil quantity l (qt) 2,5 (2,65)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x BPV 70
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 154 (40)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Tandem gear pump - replenishing / fan drive type 38 ZP + 16 ZP
max. flow replenishing - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 83 (22)
+4
max. operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 16
max. flow fan drive - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 35 (9,2)
+10
max. operating pressure (electronic regulated) pmax bar 130
Gear motor - fan drive type ZM 0511
+100
operation RPM 1/min 1990
Travel motors type 2 x BMV 135

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A 10 V 071


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 156 (41,2)
stand by pressure(HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 160
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 53 (14)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Battery 2 x 12 V, 110 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 5,4
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see operation and maintenance manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 450 D 584
Construction 2 stage planetary gear
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx-5600

Datum Edition Date

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.24.01
Feuille
PR 722 B - F/N 281 - BL - F/N 397 - BM - F/N 347 -
5600 5600 5600

TRAVEL GEAR
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
Ratio i total 41,7 : 1
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 8,5 (8,9)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm / inch 175,5 / 6,9
Track chain length links 43 47
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 711 / 812 / 914
Track pad bolts thread. size 5/8 UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty. 4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty. 3 4
Track roller location s-d-s-d-s-d-s s-d-s-d-d-s-d-s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 2,5

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 1140 90 / 50 / 1030


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 90 / 50 / 850

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 100


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 170

Angle cylinder 6-way blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 120 / 60 / 325

Ripper cylinder - cyl. / rod / stroke mm 140 / 70 / 450

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 11 (0 - 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 4,6 (0 - 2.8)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 171


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 750

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3105


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 3890 3910
overall length with straight blade mm 4695 5045
overall length with 6-way-blade (straight) mm 5220 5190
overall length with 6-way-blade (angled) mm 5805 5895
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1800 2084
ground clearance mm 370

Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13740 / 14000 14400/14600/14850
Operating weight w. 6-way-blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 13350 / 13550 13795 / 14035 14300/14550/14800

Straight blade: blade width mm 3000 3600


3
blade capacity m 2,85 3,13
weight - attachment complete kg 1650 1800
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm2 0,51 / 0,43 0,46 / 0,39 0,35 / 0,31 / 0,28
6-way-blade: blade width mm 3200 3790
width (angled) mm 3490 3490
3
blade capacity m 2,59 3,11
weight - attachment complete kg 1575 1770
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,46 / 0,39 0,34 / 0,31 / 0,28
Ripper(3): length add.(lowered) mm 1235
length add.(raised) mm 945
weight kg 1100
slope angle 30
Winch additional length mm 635
weight kg 1200
height drawbar pull mm 530
max. line pull kN 300 (30,6t)
max. line speed m/min 0-96 infinitely variable
cable size mm 22
max. length m 50
PR 732 > 2003 L>2003 M > 2003
Type No. 350 412 351
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 9306 TB LIEBHERR
Engine version 6 Cyl. V
Rating to DIN 6271 kW 132 ( 180 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 1800
Low idle RPM 1/min 800+50
High idle RPM 1/min 1900+60
Displacement l (cu. in) 12,0 (732)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 25.5 (27)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3
Max. machine inclination > all directions 45 = 100 %
Valve clearance > cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1>6>3>5>2>4
Coolant capacity l (gal) 59 (15.5)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 375 (98.7)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 17 > 27 (4.5 > 7.1)

SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 375
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,860
Oil quantity l (qt) 3 (3.2)
Oil specifications see lube oil group. 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2BPV 100
max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 2209 (55)
max. operating pressure bar 420
Gear pump > repl. circuit type BOSCH 0510
max. flow Q max. l/min (gal/min) 83 (22)
max. operating pressure (Sp) bar 16+4
Travel motors type 2BMV 186

Variable flow working hydraulic pump > type A10V100


max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 209 (55)
stand by pressure (HD) bar 20
max. operating pressure (HD) bar 160
Servo > operating pressure > working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


> +circuit capacity l (gal) 87 (23)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Batteries 212 V 143 AH (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 6,6
Automatic circuit breaker A 60
Fuses A see Operation and Maintenance Manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 500 / 515
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/a partir de

PR 732 F/N xxx> 2003 2500


Datum Edition Date
Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.30.01
PR 732 >2003 L>2003 M > 2003
Type No. 350 412 351
TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 46,5
Oil quantity l (qt) 27.5 (7.6)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 203,2 ( 8,0) 203,2 ( 8,0) 203,2 ( 8,0)
Track chain length links 39 43 43
Track pad width (single grouser) mm 508 / 610 508 / 610 711 / 812
Track pad bolts thread. size 3/4 UNF 3/4 UNF 3/4 UNF
Track rollers > single flange (s) qty. 4 4 4
Track rollers > double flange (d) qty. 2 4 4
Track roller location s>d>s>s>d>s s>d>s>d>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>d>s>d>s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2 2
Max. roller frame oscillation +/> 3 +/>3 +/> 3

ATTACHMENT
Lift cylinder bearing > lube oil quantity l (qt) 0.65 (0.68)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group. 1.3

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 100 / 50 / 1300


6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 150 / 70 / 140


6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm

Angle cylinder 6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm

Ripper cylinder > cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 160 / 80 / 530

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 11 (0 > 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 4,6 (0 > 2.8)
Basic machine: height over cab mm 3240
overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 4090 4140 4140
overall length with straight blade mm 5110 5395 5395
overall length with 6>way blade (straight) mm
overall length with 6>way blade (angled) mm
track gauge (+1width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1880 1880 2180
ground clearance mm 415 415 415
Operating weight w. straight blade (varies due to pad width) kg 17150 / 17400 17900 / 18100 18730 / 19150
Operating weight w. 6>way blade (varies due to pad width) kg
Straight blade: blade width mm 3200 3200 3900
blade capacity m3 4.49 4.49 4.34
weight > attachment complete kg 2425 2425 2452
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.63 / 0.53 0.57 / 0.48 0.37 / 0.32
6>way blade: blade width mm
width (angled) mm
blade capacity m3
weight > attachment complete kg
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2
Ripper: add. length ripper lowered mm 1385
add. length ripper raised mm 1055
weight > ripper complete kg 1820
max. slope angle 31,5
Winch: additional length mm 795
weight kg 1400
max. slope angle
height cable exit 1315
height drawbar pull mm 500
max. line pull kN (t) 390 (39)
max. line speed m/min 0 > 92 infinitely variable
cable size a mm 26
max. length m 70
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
25012999 25012999 25012999

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 916 T LIEBHERR
Engine version 6 cylinder in line - turbocharged
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 132 (180 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 1800
+50
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
+80
High idle RPM 1/min 1900
Displacement l (cu. in) 9,16 (558,78)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 22 (23,25)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance - cold intake / exhaust mm 0,20 / 0,25
Firing order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Coolant capacity l (gal) 56 (14,7)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 375 (99,1)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 17 - 27 (4,5 - 7,1)

50
Visco fan - at rated RPM 1/min 1630
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 375
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,860
Oil quantity l (qt) 3 (3,2)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x BPV 100
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 209 (55)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Gear pump - repl. circuit type BOSCH 0510
max flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 83 (22)
+4
max operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 16
Travel motors type 2 x BMV 186

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A 10 V 100


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 209 (55)
stand by pressure(HD) bar 25
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 160
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 87 (23)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Battery 2 x 12 V, 143 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 6,6
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see operation and maintenance manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 500 P 555
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
Gear ratio i total 46,5 : 1
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss!
PR 732 B F/N xxx-2501 2999
Datum Edition Date

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.31.01
Feuille
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
25012999 25012999 25012999

TRAVEL GEAR
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 18 (19)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm / inch 203,2 / 8,0
Track chain length links 39 43
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 812 / 965
Track pad bolts thread. size UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty. 4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty. 2 4
Track roller location e-d-e-e-d-e e-d-e-d-d-e-d-e
Carrier rollers each side 1 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 3

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 100 / 50 / 1300


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 100 / 50 / 1300

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 150 / 70 / 140


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 150 / 70 / 680

Angle cylinder 6-way blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 150 / 70 / 785

Ripper cylinder - cyl. / rod / stroke mm 160 / 80 / 530

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 11 (0 - 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 4,6 (0 - 2.8)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 234


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 800

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3240


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 4090 4140
overall length with straight blade mm 5110 5395
overall length with 6-way-blade (straight) mm 5560 5885
overall length with 6-way-blade (angled) mm 6120 6445
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1880 2180
ground clearance mm 474

Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 17150 / 17400 17900 / 18100 18730 / 19150
Operating weight w. 6-way-blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 20000 / 20250 20650 / 20950

Straight blade: blade width mm 3200 3900


3
blade capacity m 4,49 4,34
weight - attachment complete kg 2425 2452
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,63 / 0,53 0,57 / 0,48 0,37 / 0,32
6-way-blade: blade width mm 3600
width (angled) mm 3390
3
blade capacity m 4,13
weight - attachment complete kg 3120
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,74 / 0,62 0,66 / 0,56
Ripper(3): length add.(lowered) mm 1385
length add.(raised) mm 1055
weight kg 1720
slope angle 31 / 36,5
Winch additional length mm 795
weight kg 1400
height drawbar pull mm 500
max. line pull kN 390 (39t)
max. line speed m/min 0-92 infinitely variable
cable size mm 26
max. length m 70
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
30003135 30003135 30003135

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 926 T - E A2
Engine version 6 cylinder in line - turbocharged
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 132 (180 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 1800
+50
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
+80
High idle RPM 1/min 1900
Displacement l (cu. in) 9,96 (607,8)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 20 (21,1)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance - cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 59 / 1,9 (15,5 / 0,5)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 375 (99,1)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 16 - 28 (4,2 - 7,4)

50
Visco fan - at rated RPM 1/min 1630
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 375
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,860
Oil quantity l (qt) 3 (3,2)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x BPV 100
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 209 (55)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Gear pump - repl. circuit type BOSCH 0510
max flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 83 (22)
+4
max operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 16
Travel motors type 2 x BMV 186

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A 10 V 100


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 209 (55)
stand by pressure(HD) bar 25
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 160
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 87 (23)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Battery 2 x 12 V, 143 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 6,6
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see operation and maintenance manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 500 P 555
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
Gear ratio i total 46,5 : 1
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss!
PR 732 B F/N xxx-3000 3135
Datum Edition Date

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.32.01
Feuille
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
30003135 30003135 30003135

TRAVEL GEAR
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 18 (19)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm / inch 203,2 / 8,0
Track chain length links 39 43
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 812 / 965
Track pad bolts thread. size UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty. 4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty. 2 4
Track roller location e-d-e-e-d-e e-d-e-d-d-e-d-e
Carrier rollers each side 1 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 3

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 100 / 50 / 1300


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 100 / 50 / 1300

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 150 / 70 / 140


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 150 / 70 / 680

Angle cylinder 6-way blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 150 / 70 / 785

Ripper cylinder - cyl. / rod / stroke mm 160 / 80 / 530

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 11 (0 - 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 4,6 (0 - 2.8)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 234


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 800

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3240


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 4090 4140
overall length with straight blade mm 5110 5395
overall length with 6-way-blade (straight) mm 5560 5885
overall length with 6-way-blade (angled) mm 6120 6445
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1880 2180
ground clearance mm 474

Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 17150 / 17400 17900 / 18100 18730 / 19150
Operating weight w. 6-way-blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 20000 / 20250 20650 / 20950

Straight blade: blade width mm 3200 3900


3
blade capacity m 4,49 4,34
weight - attachment complete kg 2425 2452
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,63 / 0,53 0,57 / 0,48 0,37 / 0,32
6-way-blade: blade width mm 3600
width (angled) mm 3390
3
blade capacity m 4,13
weight - attachment complete kg 3120
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,74 / 0,62 0,66 / 0,56
Ripper(3): length add.(lowered) mm 1385
length add.(raised) mm 1055
weight kg 1720
slope angle 31 / 36,5
Winch additional length mm 795
weight kg 1400
height drawbar pull mm 500
max. line pull kN 390 (39t)
max. line speed m/min 0-92 infinitely variable
cable size mm 26
max. length m 70
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
31365599 31365599 31365599

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 926 T - E A2
Engine version 6 cylinder in line - turbocharged
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 132 (180 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 1800
+50
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
+80
High idle RPM 1/min 1900
Displacement l (cu. in) 9,96 (607,8)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 20 (21,1)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance - cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 59 / 1,9 (15,5 / 0,5)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 375 (99,1)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 16 - 28 (4,2 - 7,4)

50
Visco fan - at rated RPM 1/min 1630
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 375
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,860
Oil quantity l (qt) 3 (3,2)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x BPV 100
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 209 (55)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Gear pump - repl. circuit type BOSCH 0510
max flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 83 (22)
+4
max operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 16
Travel motors type 2 x BMV 186

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A 10 V 100


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 209 (55)
stand by pressure(HD) bar 25
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 160
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 87 (23)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Battery 2 x 12 V, 143 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 6,6
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see operation and maintenance manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 500 D 585
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
Gear ratio i total 46,5 : 1
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss!
PR 732 B F/N xxx-3136 5599
Datum Edition Date

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.33.01
Feuille
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
31365599 31365599 31365599

TRAVEL GEAR
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 11 (11,6)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm / inch 203,2 / 8,0
Track chain length links 39 43
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 812 / 965
Track pad bolts thread. size UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty. 4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty. 2 4
Track roller location s-d-s-s-d-s s-d-s-d-d-s-d-s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 3

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 100 / 50 / 1300


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 100 / 50 / 1300

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 150 / 70 / 140


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 150 / 70 / 680

Angle cylinder 6-way blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 150 / 70 / 785

Ripper cylinder - cyl. / rod / stroke mm 160 / 80 / 530

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 11 (0 - 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 4,6 (0 - 2.8)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 234


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 800

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3240


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 4090 4140
overall length with straight blade mm 5110 5395
overall length with 6-way-blade (straight) mm 5560 5885
overall length with 6-way-blade (angled) mm 6120 6445
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1880 2180
ground clearance mm 474

Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 17150 / 17400 17900 / 18100 18730 / 19150
Operating weight w. 6-way-blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 20000 / 20250 20650 / 20950

Straight blade: blade width mm 3200 3900


3
blade capacity m 4,49 4,34
weight - attachment complete kg 2425 2452
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,63 / 0,53 0,57 / 0,48 0,37 / 0,32
6-way-blade: blade width mm 3600
width (angled) mm 3390
3
blade capacity m 4,13
weight - attachment complete kg 3120
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,74 / 0,62 0,66 / 0,56
Ripper(3): length add.(lowered) mm 1385
length add.(raised) mm 1055
weight kg 1720
slope angle 31 / 36,5
Winch additional length mm 795
weight kg 1400
height drawbar pull mm 500
max. line pull kN 390 (39t)
max. line speed m/min 0-92 infinitely variable
cable size mm 26
max. length m 70
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
5600 5600 5600

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 926 T - E A2
Construction 6 cylinder in line - turbocharged
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 127 (172 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 1800
+50
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
+80
High idle RPM 1/min 1900
Displacement l (cu. in) 9,96 (607,8)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 20 (21,1)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance - cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 59 / 1,9 (15,5 / 0,5)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 375 (99,1)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 16 - 28 (4,2 - 7,4)

SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 375
Construction 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,860
Oil quantity l (qt) 3 (3,2)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x BPV 100
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 209 (55)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Tandem gear pump - replenishing / fan drive type 45 ZP + 19 ZP
max. flow replenishing - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 94 (99,36)
max. operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 25
max. flow fan drive - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 38 (40,17)
+10
max. operating pressure (electronic regulated) pmax bar 150
Axial piston motor - fan drive type A 10 FSM
+100
operation RPM 1/min 1700
Travel motors type 2 x BMV 186

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A 10 V 100


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 209 (55)
stand by pressure(HD) bar 25
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 160
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 18 max. 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 87 (23)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Battery 2 x 12 V, 143 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 6,6
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see operation and maintenance manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 500 D 585
Construction 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss!
PR 732 B F/N xxx-5600
Datum Edition Date

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.34.01
Feuille
PR 732 B - F/N 350 - BL - F/N 412 - BM - F/N 351 -
5600 5600 5600

TRAVEL GEAR
Ratio i total 46,5 : 1
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 11 (11,6)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm / inch 203,2 / 8,0
Track chain length links 39 43
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 812 / 965
Track pad bolts thread. size UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty. 4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty. 2 4
Track roller location s-d-s-s-d-s s-d-s-d-d-s-d-s
Carrier rollers each side 1 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 3

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 100 / 50 / 1300


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 100 / 50 / 1300

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 150 / 70 / 140


6-way-blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 150 / 70 / 680

Angle cylinder 6-way blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 150 / 70 / 785

Ripper cylinder - cyl. / rod / stroke mm 160 / 80 / 530

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal range km/h (mph) 0 11,0 (0 6,8)
reduced range km/h (mph) 0 4,6 (0 2,8)

Travel speed normal range = III km/h (mph) 0 11,0 (0 6,8)


reduced range - II km/h (mph) 0 6,5 (0 4,0)
reduced range - I km/h (mph) 0 4,0 (0 2,4)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 234


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 800

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3240


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 4090 4140
overall length with straight blade mm 5110 5395
overall length with 6-way-blade (straight) mm 5560 5885
overall length with 6-way-blade (angled) mm 6120 6445
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1880 2180
ground clearance mm 474

Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 17150 / 17400 17900 / 18100 18730 / 19150
Operating weight w. 6-way-blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 20000 / 20250 20650 / 20950

Straight blade: blade width mm 3200 3900


3
blade capacity m 4,49 4,34
weight - attachment complete kg 2425 2452
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,63 / 0,53 0,57 / 0,48 0,37 / 0,32
6-way-blade: blade width mm 3600
width (angled) mm 3390
3
blade capacity m 4,13
weight - attachment complete kg 3120
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,74 / 0,62 0,66 / 0,56
Ripper(3): length add.(lowered) mm 1385
length add.(raised) mm 1055
weight kg 1720
slope angle 31 / 36,5
Winch additional length mm 795
weight kg 1400
height drawbar pull mm 500
max. line pull kN 390 (39t)
max. line speed m/min 0-92 infinitely variable
cable size mm 26
max. length m 70
PR 742 > 2001 M > 2001
Type No. 352 353
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 9306 T LIEBHERR
Engine version 6 Cyl. V
Rating to DIN 6271 kW 172 (234 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 1800
Low idle RPM 1/min 800+50
High idle RPM 1/min 1900+60
Displacement l (cu. in) 12,0 (732)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 25.5 (27)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3
Max. machine inclination > all directions 45 = 100 %
Valve clearance > cold intake / exhaust mm 0.25 / 0.30
Firing order 1>6>3>5>2>4
Coolant capacity l (gal) 69 (18.2)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 460 (121.5)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 35>40 (9.2 > 10.5)

SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 376
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,860
Oil quantity l (qt) 3 (3.2)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group. 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2HPV 130
max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 2272 (72)
max. operating pressure bar 420
Gear pump > replenishing / coolant circuit type BOSCH ZP 56
max. flow Q max. l/min (gal/min) 117 (30.9)
max. operating pressure (Sp) bar 25
Gear pump > pump control / replenishing type BOSCH ZP 16
max. flow Q max. l/min (gal/min) 33 (8.7)
max. operting pressure (St) bar 50
Travel motors type 2BMV 260

Variable flow working hydraulic pump > type HPR 130


max. flow > Q max. l/min (gal/min) 272 (72)
stand by pressure (HD) bar 30+5
max. operating pressure (HD) bar 160
Servo > operating pressure > working hydraulic (ND) bar 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 189 (50)


> +circuit capacity l (gal) 77 (20.3)
Oil specifications see lube oil>group 1.3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Batteries 212 V 143 AH (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 6.6
Automatic circuit breaker A 60
Fuses A see Operation and Maintenance Manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2FAT 550 / 516
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
/..
Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/a partir de

Datum Edition Date PR 742 F/N xxx> 2001 2500


Technical Data
01 01 Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.1.40.01
PR 742 >2001 M > 2001
Type No. 352 353
TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 42.9
Oil quantity l (qt) 11 (11.6)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm(inch) 215.9 ( 8.5) 215.9 (8.5)
Track chain length links 40 43
Track pad width (single grouser) mm 508 / 610 / 710 812 / 914
Track pad bolts thread. size 3/4 UNF 3/4 UNF
Track rollers > single flange (s) qty. 4 4
Track rollers > double flange (d) qty. 3 4
Track roller location s>d>s>d>s>d>s s>d>s>d>d>s>d>s
Carrier rollers each side 2 2
Max. roller frame oscillation +/>3 +/>3

ATTACHMENT
Lift cylinder bearing > lube oil quantity l (qt) 0.65 (0.68)
Oil specifications see lube oil > group. 1.3

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 110 / 60 / 1345


6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 180 / 80 / 170


6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm

Angle cylinder 6>way blade cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm

Ripper cylinder > cyl. a / rod a / stroke mm 180 / 80 / 530

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 11 (0 > 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 > 4.6 (0 > 2.8)
Basic machine: height over cab mm 3305
overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 4300
overall length with straight blade mm 5460 5770
overall length with 6>way blade (straight) mm
overall length with 6>way blade (angled) mm
track gauge (+1width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1980 2180
ground clearance mm 410 410
Operating weight w. straight blade (varies due to pad width) kg 21600 / 21900 / 23000 / 23300
22200
Operating weight w. 6>way blade (varies due to pad width) kg
Straight blade: blade width mm 3860 4500
blade capacity m3 6.53 6.23
weight > attachment complete kg 3715 3805
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2 0.72 / 0.61 / 0.53 0.43 / 0.39
6>way blade: blade width mm
width (angled) mm
blade capacity m3
weight > attachment complete kg
ground pressure (varies due to pad width) kg/cm2
Ripper: add. length ripper lowered mm 1675
add. length ripper raised mm 1130
weight > ripper complete kg 2600
max. slope angle 29
Winch: additional length mm 740
weight kg 2250
max. slope angle
height cable exit 1325
height drawbar pull mm 510
max. line pull kN (t) 520 (53)
max. line speed m/min 0 > 80 infinitely variable
cable size a mm 28
max. length m 60
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
25012999 25012999 25012999

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 926 TI LIEBHERR
Engine version 6 cylinder in line - intercooled
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 172 (234 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 1800
+50
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
+80
High idle RPM 1/min 1900
Displacement l (cu. in) 9,96 (607.9)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 22 (23.2)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance - cold intake / exhaust mm 0,20 / 0,25
Firing order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Coolant capacity l (gal) 62 (16.4)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 450 ( 118.9)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 32 - 37 (8.4 - 9.8)

50
Visco fan - at rated RPM 1/min 1560
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 376
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,860
Oil quantity l (qt) 3 (3.2)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x HPV 130
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 272 (2 x 72)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Tandem gear pump - repl.- / cool.- / pump contr. circuit type PRN 55 + 17S SC37 G
replenishing / coolant circuit - max. flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 117 (31)
max. operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 25
pump control / replenishing - max. flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 33 (8.7)
max. operating pressure (St) pmax bar 50
Travel motors type 2 x BMV 260

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A 10 V 140


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 292 (77.1)
stand by pressure(HD) bar 25
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 160
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 88 (23.2)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Battery 2 x 12 V, 143 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 6,6
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see operation and maintenance manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 550 P 556
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss!

Datum Edition Date


PR 742 B F/N xxx-2501 2999

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.41.01
Feuille
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
25012999 25012999 25012999

TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 43,9 : 1
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 23 (24,3)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm / inch 215,9 / 8,5
Track chain length links 39 43
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 / 710 812 / 914
Track pad bolts thread. size UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty. 4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty. 3 4
Track roller location s-d-s-d-s-d-s s-d-s-d-d-s-d-s
Carrier rollers each side 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 3

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 110 / 60 / 1345

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 180 / 80 / 170

Ripper cylinder - cyl. / rod / stroke mm 180 / 80 / 530

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 11 (0 - 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 4,6 (0 - 2.8)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 285


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 850

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3305


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 4300
overall length with straight blade mm 5460 5770
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1980 2180
ground clearance mm 482

22150 / 22450 / 22925 / 23225


Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 23550 / 23850
22750 23525

Straight blade: blade width mm 3990 4500


3
blade capacity m 6,37 6,27
weight - attachment complete kg 3540 3610
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,73 / 0,62 / 0,54 0,69 / 0,58 / 0,50 0,44 / 0,40

Ripper(3): length add.(lowered) mm 1675


length add.(raised) mm 1130
weight kg 2600
slope angle 29 / 36,5

Winch additional length mm 740


weight kg 2550
height drawbar pull mm 510
max. line pull kN (t) 520 (53t)
max. line speed m/min 0-80 infinitely variable
cable size mm 28
max. length m 60
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
30003088 30003088 30003088

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 926 TI - E A2
Engine version 6 cylinder in line - intercooled
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 172 (234 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 1800
+50
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
+80
High idle RPM 1/min 1900
Displacement l (cu. in) 9,96 (607.9)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 25,5 (27)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance - cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 62 / 2,4 (16.4 / 0.66)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 450 ( 118.9)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 20 - 35

50
Visco fan - at rated RPM 1/min 1560
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 376
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,860
Oil quantity l (qt) 3 (3.2)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x HPV 130
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 272 (2 x 72)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Tandem gear pump - repl.- / cool.- / pump contr. circuit type PRN 55 + 17S SC37 G
replenishing / coolant circuit - max. flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 117 (31)
max. operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 25
pump control / replenishing - max. flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 33 (8.7)
max. operating pressure (St) pmax bar 50
Travel motors type 2 x BMV 260

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A 10 V 140


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 292 (77.1)
stand by pressure(HD) bar 25
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 160
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 88 (23.2)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Battery 2 x 12 V, 143 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 6,6
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see operation and maintenance manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 550 P 556
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss!

Datum Edition Date


PR 742 B F/N xxx-3000 3088

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.42.01
Feuille
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
30003088 30003088 30003088

TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 43,9 : 1
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 23 (24,3)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm / inch 215,9 / 8,5
Track chain length links 39 43
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 / 710 812 / 914
Track pad bolts thread. size UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty. 4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty. 3 4
Track roller location s-d-s-d-s-d-s s-d-s-d-d-s-d-s
Carrier rollers each side 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 3

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 110 / 60 / 1345

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 180 / 80 / 170

Ripper cylinder - cyl. / rod / stroke mm 180 / 80 / 530

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 11 (0 - 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 4,6 (0 - 2.8)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 285


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 850

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3305


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 4300
overall length with straight blade mm 5460 5770
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1980 2180
ground clearance mm 482

22150 / 22450 / 22925 / 23225


Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 23550 / 23850
22750 23525

Straight blade: blade width mm 3990 4500


3
blade capacity m 6,37 6,27
weight - attachment complete kg 3540 3610
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,73 / 0,62 / 0,54 0,69 / 0,58 / 0,50 0,44 / 0,40

Ripper(3): length add.(lowered) mm 1675


length add.(raised) mm 1130
weight kg 2600
slope angle 29 / 36,5

Winch additional length mm 740


weight kg 2550
height drawbar pull mm 510
max. line pull kN (t) 520 (53t)
max. line speed m/min 0-80 infinitely variable
cable size mm 28
max. length m 60
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
30895233 30895233 30895233

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 926 TI - E A2
Engine version 6 cylinder in line - intercooled
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 172 (234 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 1800
+50
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
+80
High idle RPM 1/min 1900
Displacement l (cu. in) 9,96 (607.9)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 25,5 (27)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance - cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 62 / 2,4 (16.4 / 0.66)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 450 ( 118.9)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 20 - 35 (5.3 - 9.2)

50
Visco fan - at rated RPM 1/min 1560
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 376
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,860
Oil quantity l (qt) 3 (3.2)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x HPV 130
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 272 (2 x 72)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Tandem gear pump - repl.- / cool.- / pump contr. circuit type PRN 55 + 17S SC37 G
replenishing / coolant circuit - max. flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 117 (31)
max. operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 25
pump control / replenishing - max. flow Qmax l/min (gal/min) 33 (8.7)
max. operating pressure (St) pmax bar 50
Travel motors type 2 x BMV 260

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A 10 V 140


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 292 (77.1)
stand by pressure(HD) bar 25
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 160
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 88 (23.2)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Battery 2 x 12 V, 143 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 6,6
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see operation and maintenance manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 550 D 586
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss!

Datum Edition Date


PR 742 B F/N xxx-3089 5233

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.43.01
Feuille
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
30895233 30895233 30895233

TRAVEL GEAR
Gear ratio i total 43,9 : 1
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 14,5 (15,3)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm / inch 215,9 / 8,5
Track chain length links 39 43
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 / 710 812 / 914
Track pad bolts thread. size UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty. 4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty. 3 4
Track roller location s-d-s-d-s-d-s s-d-s-d-d-s-d-s
Carrier rollers each side 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 3

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 110 / 60 / 1345

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 180 / 80 / 170

Ripper cylinder - cyl. / rod / stroke mm 180 / 80 / 530

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 11 (0 - 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 4,6 (0 - 2.8)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 285


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 850

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3305


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 4300
overall length with straight blade mm 5460 5770
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1980 2180
ground clearance mm 482

22950 / 23350 / 23700 / 24100


Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 24600 / 24950
23750 24450

Straight blade: blade width mm 3990 4500


3
blade capacity m 6,37 6,27
weight - attachment complete kg 3540 3610
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,76 / 0,65 / 0,57 0,72 / 0,59 / 0,53 0,46 / 0,42

Ripper(3): length add.(lowered) mm 1675


length add.(raised) mm 1130
weight kg 2600
slope angle 29 / 36,5

Winch additional length mm 740


weight kg 2550
height drawbar pull mm 510
max. line pull kN (t) 520 (53t)
max. line speed m/min 0-80 infinitely variable
cable size mm 28
max. length m 60
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
52345599 52345599 52345599

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 926 TI - E A2
Engine version 6 cylinder in line - intercooled
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 172 (234 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 1800
+50
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
+80
High idle RPM 1/min 1900
Displacement l (cu. in) 9,96 (607,9)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 25,5 (27)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance - cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 62 / 2,4 (16,4 / 0,66)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 450 ( 118,9)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 20 - 35 (5,3 - 9,2)

50
Visco fan - at rated RPM 1/min 1560
SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 374
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,860
Oil quantity l (qt) 3 (3,2)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x HPV 135
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 282 (2 x 75)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Tandem gear pump - replenishing - coolant circuit / fan drive type PRN 55 + 17S SC37 G
max. flow - Qmax total(Q1+Q2) l/min (gal/min) 150 (39,6)
max. operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 25
Travel motors type 2 x BMV 260

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A 10 V 140


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 292 (77,1)
stand by pressure(HD) bar 25
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 160
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 88 (23,2)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Battery 2 x 12 V, 143 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 6,6
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see operation and maintenance manual

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 550 D 586
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
Gear ratio i total 43,9 : 1
/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss!

Datum Edition Date


PR 742 B F/N xxx-5234 5599

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.44.01
Feuille
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
52345599 52345599 52345599

TRAVEL GEAR
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 14,5 (15,3)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm / inch 215,9 / 8,5
Track chain length links 39 43
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 / 710 812 / 914
Track pad bolts thread. size UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty.4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty.3 4
Track roller location s-d-s-d-s-d-s s-d-s-d-d-s-d-s
Carrier rollers each side qty 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 3

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 110 / 60 / 1345

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 180 / 80 / 170

Ripper cylinder - cyl. / rod / stroke mm 180 / 80 / 530

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 11 (0 - 6.8)
reduced speed range km/h (mp/h) 0 - 4,6 (0 - 2.8)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 285


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 850

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3305


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 4300
overall length with straight blade mm 5460 5770
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1980 2180
ground clearance mm 482

22950 / 23350 / 23700 / 24100


Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 24600 / 24950
23750 24450

Straight blade: blade width mm 3990 4500


3
blade capacity m 6,37 6,27
weight - attachment complete kg 3540 3610
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,76 / 0,65 / 0,57 0,72 / 0,59 / 0,53 0,46 / 0,42

Ripper(3): length add.(lowered) mm 1675


length add.(raised) mm 1130
weight kg 2600
slope angle 29 / 36,5

Winch additional length mm 740


weight kg 2550
height drawbar pull mm 510
max. line pull kN 520 (53t)
max. line speed m/min 0-80 infinitely variable
cable size mm 28
max. length m 60
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
5600 5600 5600

DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 926 TI - E A2
Engine version 6 cylinder in line - intercooled
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 172 (234 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 1800
+50
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
+80
High idle RPM 1/min 1900
Displacement l (cu. in) 9,96 (607.9)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 25,5 (27)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance - cold intake / exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 62 / 2,4 (16.4 / 0.66)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 450 ( 118.9)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 20 - 35 (5.3 - 9.2)

SPLITTER BOX
Type 350 B 374
Gear version 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,860
Oil quantity l (qt) 3 (3,2)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2 x HPV 135
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2 x 282 (2x 75)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Tandem gear pump - replenishing - coolant circuit / fan drive type PRN 55 + 17S SC37 G
max. flow replenishing - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 117 (30,8)
max. operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 25
max. flow fan drive - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 33 (8,7)
+10
max. operating pressure (electronic regulated) pmax bar 210
Axial piston motor - fan drive type A 10 FSM
+100
operation RPM 1/min 1475
Travel motors type 2 x BMV 260

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type A 10 V 140


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 292 (77,1)
stand by pressure(HD) bar 25
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 160
Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 178 (47)


+ circuit capacity l (gal) 88 (23,2)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Battery 2 x 12 V, 143 Ah (in series)
Alternator 28 V 55 A
Starter kW 6,6
Automatic circuit breaker A 35
Fuses A see operation and maintenance manual

/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss!

Datum Edition Date


PR 742 B F/N xxx-5600

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.45.01
Feuille
PR 742 B - F/N 352 - BL - F/N 581 - BM - F/N 353 -
5600 5600 5600

TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2 x FAT 550 D 586
Gear version 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) disk brake
Gear ratio i total 43,9 : 1
Oil quantity l (qt) 2 x 14,5 (15,3)
Oil specifications see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm / inch 215,9 / 8,5
Track chain length links 39 43
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 508 / 610 / 710 812 / 914
Track pad bolts thread. size UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty.4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty.3 4
Track roller location e-d-e-d-e-d-e e-d-e-d-d-e-d-e
Carrier rollers each side qty. 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 3

ATTACHMENT

Lift cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 110 / 60 / 1345

Tilt cylinder straight blade cyl. / rod / stroke mm 180 / 80 / 170

Ripper cylinder - cyl. / rod / stroke mm 180 / 80 / 530

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal range = III km/h (mph) 0 11,0 (0 6,8)
reduced range - II km/h (mph) 0 6,5 (0 4,0) from F/N xxx-6200 reverse 0 7,8 (0 4,8)
reduced range - I km/h (mph) 0 4,0 (0 2,4) from F/N xxx-6200 reverse 0 4,8 (0 3,0)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 285


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 850

Basic machine: height over cab mm 3305


overall length w/o attachment (transport dimension) mm 4300
overall length with straight blade mm 5460 5770
track gauge (+ 1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 1980 2180
ground clearance mm 482

22950 / 23350 / 23700 / 24100


Operating weight w. straight blade ( varies due to pad width) kg 24600 / 24950
23750 24450

Straight blade: blade width mm 3990 4500


3
blade capacity m 6,37 6,27
weight - attachment complete kg 3540 3610
2
ground pressure (varies due to pad width). kg/cm 0,76 / 0,65 / 0,57 0,72 / 0,59 / 0,53 0,46 / 0,42

Ripper(3): length add.(lowered) mm 1675


length add.(raised) mm 1130
weight kg 2600
slope angle 29 / 36,5

Winch additional length mm 740


weight kg 2550
height drawbar pull mm 510
max. line pull kN 520 (53t)
max. line speed m/min 0-80 infinitely variable
cable size mm 28
max. length m 60
PR 752 F/N 324-
22005599
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 9406 TI-E A3
Construction 6 cyl. V - intercooled
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 243 (326 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 1800
+50
Low idle RPM 1/min 800
+60
High idle RPM 1/min 1900
Displacement l (cu. in) 12,88 (786)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 24 (25,4)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance -cold intake/exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-6-3-5-2-4
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 68 / 2,5 (17,9 / 0,66)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 610 (161)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 29 - 50 (7,6 - 13,2)

SPLITTERBOX
Type 350 B 365
Construction 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,83
Oil quantity l (qt) 6 (6,3)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2xBPV 200 L-EH
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2x425 (2x112,3)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
HY/ZGGS11/45+38 L (F/N -20022006 = PRR 44+32 SC,
Tandem gear pumps - replenishing/coolant circuit type
F/N -20072027 = HY/ZGGS11/45+32L)
max. flow - Qmax total (Q1+Q2) l/min (gal/min) 180 (47,6) (162 (42,8))
max. operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 25
Travel motors type 4xBMV 186 HF

Variable flow pump - fan drive A10V28


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 58 (15,3)
max. operating pressure (LA) pmax bar 160
stand by pressure (LA) (when machine is cold) bar 30
Axial piston-constant motor (fan - water cooler) type AA10FM28
operation RPM nmax (nmin) 1/min 1300 (350)
Gear motor (fan - hydraulic oil cooler) type SNM2/19 CO 02
operation RPM nmax (nmin) 1/min 1900 (500)

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type HPR 160


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 336 (88,7)
stand by pressure (HD) bar 30
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 200

Control valve block - working hydraulic type M7-3022

Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 210 (55,4)


- +circuit capacity l (gal) 170 (44,8)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Batteries 2x12V 170Ah (in series)
Alternator 28V 55A
Starter kW 9
Automatic circuit breaker A 45
Fuses A see Operation and Maintenance Manual

/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss!

Datum Edition Date


PR 752 F/N 324-20025599

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.50.01
Feuille
PR 752 F/N 324-
20025599
TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2xFAT 650 / 508
Construction spur- + 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) 4x disk brake
Ratio i total 54,3 : 1
Oil quantity - gear area l (qt) 2x21 (22,2)
Oil quantity - sealed area l (qt) 9,4 (9,9)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 215,9 (8,5)
Track chain length links 44
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 560 / 610 / 711
Track pad bolts thread. size 7/8 UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty.4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty.3
Track roller location s-d-s-d-s-d-s
Carrier rollers each side qty. 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 3

ATTACHMENT
Semi-U-Blade
Lift cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 120 / 070 / 1490
Tilt cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 200 / 090 / 0195
Cutting angle cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 220 / 090 / 0145

Ripper 1 tooth / 3 teeth


Lift cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 180 / 100 / 0480
Ripping angle cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 180 / 100 / 0480

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed - 2 ranges normal range km/h (mph) 0 11,0 (0 6,8)
reduced range km/h (mph) 0 4,6 (0 2,8)

Travel speed - 3 ranges normal range = III km/h (mph) 0 11,0 (0 6,8)
reduced range - II km/h (mph) 0 6,5 (0 4,0)
reduced range - I km/h (mph) 0 4,0 (0 2,4)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 460


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 1123

Basic machine height over cab mm 3640


overall length (transport dimension) mm 4885
length with semi-U blade mm 6515
track gauge (+1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 2180
ground clearance mm 625

Operating weight with semi-U blade (varies due to pad width) kg 34200 / 34400 / 34800
Ground pressure with semi-U blade (varies due to pad width) kg/cm 0,96 / 0,89 / 0,77

Semi-U blade blade width mm 4200


blade capacity m 9,54
weight blade complete kg 6350

Ripper add. length ripper lowered mm 2390


add. length ripper raised mm 1880
1 tooth weight - ripper complete kg 4200
max. penetration mm 1200
max. slope angle 33
3 teeth weight - ripper complete kg 4900
max. penetration mm 855
max. slope angle 29
PR 752 F/N 324-
56006199
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 9406 TI-E A3
Construction 6 cyl. V - intercooled
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 243 (326 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 1800
+60
Low idle RPM 1/min 750
+60
High idle RPM 1/min 1900
Displacement l (cu. in) 12,88 (786)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 26 (27,5)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance -cold intake/exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-6-3-5-2-4
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 68 / 2,5 (17,9 / 0,66)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 610 (161)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 29 - 50 (7,6 - 13,2)

SPLITTERBOX
Type 350 B 365
Construction 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,83
Oil quantity l (qt) 6 (6,3)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2xBPV 200 L-EH
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2x425 (2x112,3)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Tandem gear pumps - replenishing/coolant circuit type HY/ZGGS11/45+38 L
max. flow - Qmax total (Q1+Q2) l/min (gal/min) 180 (47,6)
max. operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 25
Travel motors type 4xBMV 186 HF

Variable flow pump - fan drive A10V28


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 58 (15,3)
max. operating pressure (LA) (electronic regulated) pmax bar 160
stand by pressure (LA) (when machine is cold) bar 30
Axial piston-constant motor (fan - water cooler) type AA10FM28
operation RPM nmax (nmin) 1/min 1300 (350)
Gear motor (fan - hydraulic oil cooler) type SNM2/19 CO 02
operation RPM nmax (nmin) 1/min 1900 (550)

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type HPR 160


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 336 (88,7)
stand by pressure (HD) bar 30
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 200

Control valve block - working hydraulic type M7-3022

Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 230 (60,7)


- +circuit capacity l (gal) 170 (44,8)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Batteries 2x12V 170Ah (in series)
Alternator 28V 80A
Starter kW 9
Automatic circuit breaker A 45
Fuses A see Operation and Maintenance Manual

/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss!

Datum Edition Date


PR 752 F/N 324-56006199

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.51.01
Feuille
PR 752 F/N 324-
56006199
TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2xFAT 650 / 508
Construction spur- + 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) 4x disk brake
Ratio i total 54,3 : 1
Oil quantity - gear area l (qt) 2x21 (22,2)
Oil quantity - sealed area l (qt) 9,4 (9,9)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 215,9 (8,5)
Track chain length links 44
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 560 / 610 / 711
Track pad bolts thread. size 7/8 UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty.4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty.3
Track roller location s-d-s-d-s-d-s
Carrier rollers each side qty. 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 3

ATTACHMENT
Semi-U-Blade
Lift cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 120 / 070 / 1490
Tilt cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 200 / 090 / 0195
Cutting angle cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 220 / 090 / 0145

Ripper 1 tooth / 3 teeth


Lift cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 180 / 100 / 0480
Ripping angle cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 180 / 100 / 0480

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed - 2 ranges normal range km/h (mph) 0 11,0 (0 6,8)
reduced range km/h (mph) 0 4,6 (0 2,8)

Travel speed - 3 ranges normal range = III km/h (mph) 0 11,0 (0 6,8)
reduced range - II km/h (mph) 0 6,5 (0 4,0)
reduced range - I km/h (mph) 0 4,0 (0 2,4)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 460


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 1123

Basic machine height over cab mm 3640


overall length (transport dimension) mm 4885
length with semi-U blade mm 6515
track gauge (+1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 2180
ground clearance mm 625

Operating weight with semi-U blade (varies due to pad width) kg 34200 / 34400 / 34800
Ground pressure with semi-U blade (varies due to pad width) kg/cm 0,96 / 0,89 / 0,77

Semi-U blade blade width mm 4200


blade capacity m 9,54
weight blade complete kg 6350

Ripper add. length ripper lowered mm 2390


add. length ripper raised mm 1880
1 tooth weight - ripper complete kg 4200
max. penetration mm 1200
max. slope angle 33
3 teeth weight - ripper complete kg 4900
max. penetration mm 855
max. slope angle 29
PR 752 F/N 324-
6200
DIESEL ENGINE
Type D 9406 TI-E A3
Construction 6 cyl. V - intercooled
Rating to ISO 9249 kW 243 (326 HP)
Rated RPM 1/min 1800
+60
Low idle RPM 1/min 750
+60
High idle RPM 1/min 1900
Displacement l (cu. in) 12,88 (786)
Oil quantity incl. filter l (qt) 26 (27,5)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3
Max. machine inclination - all directions 45 = 100%
Valve clearance -cold intake/exhaust mm 0,25 / 0,30
Firing order 1-6-3-5-2-4
Coolant capacity / DCA 4 l (gal) 68 / 2,5 (17,9 / 0,66)
Fuel tank capacity l (gal) 610 (161)
Fuel consumption appr. l/h (gal/h) 29 - 50 (7,6 - 13,2)

SPLITTERBOX
Type 350 B 365
Construction 1 stage spur gear
Ratio i 0,83
Oil quantity l (qt) 6 (6,3)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Travel pumps type 2xBPV 200 L-EH
max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 2x425 (2x112,3)
max. operating pressure (M1 / M2) pmax bar 420
Tandem gear pumps - replenishing/coolant circuit type HY/ZGGS11/45+38 L
max. flow - Qmax total (Q1+Q2) l/min (gal/min) 180 (47,6)
max. operating pressure (SP) pmax bar 25
Travel motors type 4xBMV 186 HF

Variable flow pump - fan drive A10V28


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 58 (15,3)
max. operating pressure (LA) (electronic regulated) pmax bar 190
stand by pressure (LA) (when machine is cold) bar 30
Axial piston-constant motor (fan - water cooler) type AA10FM28
operation RPM nmax (nmin) 1/min 1530 (350)
Gear motor (fan - hydraulic oil cooler) type SNM2/19 CO 02
operation RPM nmax (nmin) 1/min 2200 (550)

Variable flow working hydraulic pump type HPR 160


max. flow - Qmax l/min (gal/min) 336 (88,7)
stand by pressure (HD) bar 30
max. operating pressure (HD) pmax bar 200

Control valve block - working hydraulic type M6-1149

Servo - operating pressure - working hydraulic (ND) bar 25

Hydr. tank capacity l (gal) 230 (60,7)


- +circuit capacity l (gal) 170 (44,8)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage V 24
Batteries 2x12V 170Ah (in series)
Alternator 28V 80A
Starter kW 9
Automatic circuit breaker A 45
Fuses A see Operation and Maintenance Manual

/..

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss!

Datum Edition Date


PR 752 F/N 324-6200

01 03 Technical Data Blatt


Page 3.1.52.01
Feuille
PR 752 F/N 324-
6200
TRAVEL GEAR
Type 2xFAT 650 / 508
Construction spur- + 2 stage planetary gear
Parking brake (integrated) 4x disk brake
Ratio i total 54,3 : 1
Oil quantity - gear area l (qt) 2x21 (22,2)
Oil quantity - sealed area l (qt) 9,4 (9,9)
Oil specification see lube oil - group 1.3

TRACK COMPONENTS
Track chain pitch mm (inch) 215,9 (8,5)
Track chain length links 44
Track pad width ( single grouser) mm 560 / 610 / 711
Track pad bolts thread. size 7/8 UNF
Track rollers - single flange (s) qty.4
Track rollers - double flange (d) qty.3
Track roller location s-d-s-d-s-d-s
Carrier rollers each side qty. 2
Max. roller frame oscillation 3

ATTACHMENT
Semi-U-Blade
Lift cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 120 / 070 / 1490
Tilt cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 200 / 090 / 0195
Cutting angle cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 220 / 090 / 0145

Ripper 1 tooth / 3 teeth


Lift cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 180 / 100 / 0480
Ripping angle cylinder piston / rod / stroke mm 180 / 100 / 0480

GENERAL DATA
Travel speed normal range = III km/h (mph) 0 11,0 (0 6,8)
reduced range - II km/h (mph) 0 6,5 (0 4,0) reverse 0 7,8 (0 4,8)
reduced range - I km/h (mph) 0 4,0 (0 2,4) reverse 0 4,8 (0 3,0)

Drawbar pull max. due to ground condition kN 460


Mud depth max. measured horizontally mm 1123

Basic machine height over cab mm 3640


overall length (transport dimension) mm 4885
length with semi-U blade mm 6515
track gauge (+1 width of 1 pad = total width) mm 2180
ground clearance mm 625

Operating weight with semi-U blade (varies due to pad width) kg 34200 / 34400 / 34800
Ground pressure with semi-U blade (varies due to pad width) kg/cm 0,96 / 0,89 / 0,77

Semi-U blade blade width mm 4200


blade capacity m 9,54
weight blade complete kg 6350

Ripper add. length ripper lowered mm 2390


add. length ripper raised mm 1880
1 tooth weight - ripper complete kg 4200
max. penetration mm 1200
max. slope angle 33
3 teeth weight - ripper complete kg 4900
max. penetration mm 855
max. slope angle 29
Customer:.................................................Mach.-Type..............F/N.........-..............Hours...............Date.............
Maintenance by
operating hours
WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT

by maintenance personnel by authorized trained personnel


first and only maintenance interval OM operation/maintenance manual
{ repeat maintenance interval SM service manual
every 8 - 10

every 1000
every 2000
at delivery

every 250
every 500
at 10 - 50

cFor correct oil level, use dipstick marks - for procedure and quantities, see OM
d For quality and viscosity guidelines see Service Fluids, SM - section 1.3 Reference Notes
e For adjustment values, see data page entries in SM

DIESEL ENGINE
{ { { { { { Check engine oil level and pressure OM c
{ { { { { { Check coolant level OM c
{ { { Check radiator cap and fan OM SM
{ { { Replace coolant filter, check antifreece / DCA4 percentage in coolant OM SM cd
{ { { { { Check fuel filter water seperator - drain if necessary OM
{ { { { Replace engine oil - at least once a year OM cd
{ { { Replace lube oil filter - at least once a year OM SM
{ { { PR 712B / 722B - Replace fuel finefilter element - stage 2 OM
{ { { Check condition and tension of V-belt OM SM
{ { { Check engine, radiator and oil pan for dirt - clean if necessary OM
{ { { { Check oil, cooling and fuel system for leaks and condition OM SM
{ { { { Check air intake and exhaust system for tightness and leaks OM SM
{ { Check oil pan and engine mounts for condition and tightness OM SM
{ { Check engine RPM - adjust if necessary SM e
{ { Check and adjust valve clearance - with cold engine SM e
{ { Check and service injection pump and potentiometer linkage OM SM
{ { Drain fuel tank condensation and sediments OM
{ { PR 732B / 742B / 752 - Check fuel prefilter element - clean if necessary OM
{ { PR 732B / 742B / 752 - Replace fuel filter cartridge OM
{ { Grease flywheel teeth SM
{ { Check preheater system (before cold season) SM
{ PR 712B / 722B - Replace fuel prefilter element - stage 1 OM
Replace air filter elements - if necessary or at least once a year OM
Replace oil separator - every 2 years OM SM
Replace coolant / corrosion inhibitor and DCA4 - every 2 years OM SM cd
Check / adjust fuel injectors - if necessary or at least every 3000 operating hours SM e
Check coolant pump (at PR 752 not necessary) - every 2 years / 3000 hrs. SM e
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
{ { { { { { Check oil level in hydraulic tank OM c
{ { { { Clean magnetic rod - daily up to 250 operating hours OM SM
Replace return oil filter element in hydraulic tank, OM
{ { { check all case drain filter inserts for deposits / contamination SM
{ { { Replace pressure filter (element) of the repl. circuit OM
Check attachment and travel hydraulic system for function and leaks,
{ { { { OM SM
check hydraulic hose routing / for chafing
{ { { Drain hydraulic tank condensation and sediments (at least every 6 months) OM
{ { { Check hydraulic oil cooler - clean if necessary + check fan at PR 752 OM
{ { { Check all hydraulic pressures according setting prescription, adjust as necessary SM e
{ { { Check allscrews, nuts connections for tightness OM SM
Replace hydraulic oil (refill via tank filter) - al least every 4 years
{ - Whenever environmentally safe hydraulic fluids are used OM cd
request / observe any special guidelines from manufacturer

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx- 3000
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx- 3000
Maintenance and PR 732 B F/N xxx-3000 3039
Datum Edition Date PR 742 B F/N xxx-3000 3024
PR 752 F/N xxx-2002 2008
01 00 Inspection Guidelines Blatt
Page
Feuille 3.2.12.01
Maintenance by
operating hours
WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT

by maintenance personnel by authorized trained personnel


first and only maintenance interval OM operation/maintenance manual
{ repeat maintenance interval SM service manual
every 8 - 10

every 1000
every 2000
at delivery

every 250
every 500
at 10 - 50

cFor correct oil level, use dipstick marks - for procedure and quantities, see OM Durch- Bemer-
d For quality and viscosity guidelines see Service Fluids, SM - section 1.3 fhrungs- kungen
e For adjustment values, see data page entries in SM hinweis

SPLITTERBOX
{ { { { { Check oil level OM c
{ { { Replace gear oil - at least once a years OM cd

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
{ { { { { { { Check system function incl. indicators and gauges OM SM
{ { { { Check battery electrolyte level OM c
{ { { Check, clean and grease battery terminals OM SM
{ { { Check wire routing and connections OM SM
{ { Check control system according to adjustment checklist - adjust as necessary SM e
{ { Check battery acid concentration / charge (before cold season) SM e

HEATER / FRESH AIR SYSTEM


{ { { { Check system for function and leaks OM SM
Replace air filter - as necessary OM

TRAVEL GEAR
{ { { { Check oil level - clean magnetic plugs / magnetic rods OM c
{ { { Check screws and nuts for tightness OM SM
{ { Replace gear oil - clean magnetic plugs / magnetic rods - at least every 4 years OM cd

TRACK COMPONENTS
Check all bolts and nuts of track components,
{ { { OM SM
in particular at track pads and sprocket segments for tightness
{ { { Check track and carrier rollers, idlers for leaks OM
{ { { { PR 752 - grease outer bearings of equalizer bar - shorten interval as necessary OM e
{ { { Check idler guides / adjust, replace parts as necessary OM SM e
{ PR 752 - check screws at the outher rings of support shafts for tight seating OM SM
{ Adjust chain tension to suit application - as necessary OM SM
Clean track components - as necessary OM
Check track components for wear - as necessary SM e

ATTACHMENTS
{ { { { Check blade adjustment / centered to main frame - after every installation OM
{ { { Check bolts, nuts and pin safeties for tightness OM
Check all cutting edges, corner shanks and ripper teeth for wear,
{ { { { { { OM
check if attachments are suited to application
{ { { Check attachments for damage OM
{ { { Check all attachment bearings for play / wear OM SM e
Grease all bearings including lift cylinder forks according to the lubrication chart
{ { { { { OM d
- shorten interval as necessary

GENERAL
{ { { { Check entire machine for proper maintenance and condition OM SM
PR 752 - Grease door hinges on battery and oil cooler room - as necessary OM
Customer:...............................................Mach.-Type...........F/N.........-.............Hours..............Date............
Maintenance by
operating hours
WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT

by maintenance personnel by authorized trained personnel


first and only maintenance interval OM operation/maintenance manual
{ repeat maintenance interval SM service manual
every 8 - 10

every 1000
every 2000
at delivery

every 250
every 500
every 50

cFor correct oil level, use dipstick marks - for procedure and quantities, see OM
d For quality and viscosity guidelines see Service Fluids, SM - section 1.3 Reference Notes
e For adjustment values, see data page entries in SM

DIESEL ENGINE
{ { { { { { { Check engine oil level and pressure OM c
{ { { { { { { Check coolant level OM c
{ { { { { { Check engine, radiator and oil pan for dirt - clean if necessary OM
{ { { { { { Check fuel filter water seperator - drain if necessary OM
{ { { { { Drain fuel tank condensation and sediments - al least once a week OM
{ { { { Replace engine oil ( = as soon as after 30 operating hours) - at least once a year OM cd
{ { { Replace lube oil filter ( = as soon as after 30 operating hours) - at least once a year OM / SM
{ { { Check radiator cap and fan OM / SM
{ { { Replace coolant filter, check antifreece / DCA4 percentage in coolant OM / SM cd
{ { { Check condition and tension of V-belt OM / SM
{ { { { Check oil, cooling and fuel system for leaks and condition OM / SM
{ { { Check air intake and exhaust system for tightness and leaks OM / SM
{ { Check oil pan and engine mounts for condition and tightness OM / SM
{ { Check engine RPM - adjust if necessary SM e
{ { Check and adjust valve clearance - with cold engine SM e
{ { Check and service injection pump and potentiometer linkage OM / SM
{ { PR 712B / 722B - Replace fuel filter(s) (prefilter and fine filter elements) - stage 1 and 2 OM
{ { PR 732B / 742B / 752 - Check fuel prefilter element - clean if necessary OM
{ { PR 732B / 742B / 752 - Replace fuel filter cartridge OM
{ { Grease flywheel teeth SM
{ { Check preheater system (before cold season) SM
Replace air filter elements - if necessary or at least once a year OM
Replace oil separator - every 2 years OM / SM
Replace coolant / corrosion inhibitor and DCA4 - every 2 years OM / SM cd
Check / adjust fuel injectors - if necessary or at least every 3000 operating hours SM e

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
{ { { { { { { Check oil level in hydraulic tank OM c
{ { { { Clean magnetic rod - daily up to 250 operating hours OM / SM
Replace return oil filter element in hydraulic tank,
{ { { OM / SM
check all case drain filter inserts for deposits / contamination
{ { { Replace pressure filter (element) of the repl. circuit OM
Check attachment and travel hydraulic system for function and leaks,
{ { { { OM / SM
check hydraulic hose routing / for chafing
{ { { Drain hydraulic tank condensation and sediments (at least every 6 months) OM
{ { { Check hydraulic oil cooler - clean if necessary + PR 752 - fan for condition OM
{ { { Check all hydraulic pressures according setting prescription, adjust as necessary SM e
{ { { Check allscrews, nuts connections for tightness OM / SM
Replace hydraulic oil (refill via tank filter) - al least every 4 years
{ - Whenever environmentally safe hydraulic fluids are used OM cd
request / observe any special guidelines from manufacturer

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx-30013083
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx-3001 3170
Maintenance and PR 732 B F/N xxx-3040 3135
Datum Edition Date PR 742 B F/N xxx-3025 3088
PR 752 F/N xxx-2009 2059
01 00 Inspection Guidelines Blatt
Page
Feuille 3.2.13.01
Maintenance by
operating hours
WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT

by maintenance personnel by authorized trained personnel


first and only maintenance interval OM operation/maintenance manual
{ repeat maintenance interval SM service manual
every 8 - 10

every 1000
every 2000
at delivery

every 250
every 500
every 50

cFor correct oil level, use dipstick marks - for procedure and quantities, see OM
d For quality and viscosity guidelines see Service Fluids, SM - section 1.3 Reference Notes
e For adjustment values, see data page entries in SM

SPLITTERBOX
{ { { { { Check oil level OM c
{ { { Replace gear oil - at least every 2 years OM cd

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
{ { { { { { { Check system function incl. indicators and gauges OM / SM
{ { { { Check battery electrolyte level OM c
{ { { Check, clean and grease battery terminals OM / SM
{ { { Check wire routing and connections OM / SM
{ { Check control system according to adjustment checklist - adjust as necessary SM e
{ { Check battery acid concentration / charge (before cold season) SM e

HEATER / FRESH AIR SYSTEM


{ { { { Check system for function and leaks OM / SM
Replace air filter - as necessary OM

TRAVEL GEAR
{ { { { Check oil level - clean magnetic plugs / magnetic rods OM c
{ { { Check screws and nuts for tightness OM / SM
{ { Replace gear oil - clean magnetic plugs / magnetic rods - at least every 4 years OM cd
{ { PR 752 - replace lube oil from cone seal area - at least every 4 years OM cd

TRACK COMPONENTS
Check all bolts and nuts of track components,
{ { { OM / SM
in particular at track pads and sprocket segments for tightness
{ { { Check track and carrier rollers, idlers for leaks OM
{ { { { PR 752 - grease outer bearings of equalizer bar - shorten interval as necessary OM e
{ { { Check idler guides / adjust, replace parts as necessary OM / SM e
{ PR 752 - check screws at the outher rings of support shafts for tight seating OM / SM
{ Adjust chain tension to suit application - as necessary OM / SM
Clean track components - as necessary OM
Check track components for wear - as necessary SM e

ATTACHMENTS
Check all cutting edges, corner shanks and ripper teeth for wear,
{ { { { { { { OM
check if attachments are suited to application
Grease all bearings including lift cylinder forks according to the lubrication chart
{ { { { { OM d
- shorten interval as necessary
{ { { Check all attachment bearings for play / wear OM / SM e
{ { { { Check blade adjustment / centered to main frame - after every installation OM
{ { { Check bolts, nuts and pin safeties for tightness OM
{ { { Check attachments for damage OM

GENERAL
{ { { { Check entire machine for proper maintenance and condition OM / SM
PR 752 - Grease door hinges on battery and oil cooler room - as necessary
Explain machine literature and/or special instructions / safety guidelines to operating
{ OM
personnel
Customer:............................................Mach.-Type...........F/N(PIN).........-..............Sm.-hours............Date............
Maintenance/Inspection
by Operating Hours
WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT

by maintenance personnel by authorized trained personnel


first and only maintenance interval OM Operation Manual
{ repeat maintenance interval SM Service Manual
every 8 - 10

every 1000
every 2000
at delivery

every 250
every 500 cfor correct oil level, use dipstick marks - for procedure and quantities, see OM
every 50

d for quality and viscosity guidelines see "Service fluids", SM - section 1.3
e for adjustment values, see data page entries in SM Reference Notes

DIESEL ENGINE
{ { { { { { { Check engine oil level and pressure OM c
{ { { { { { { Check coolant level OM c
{ { { { { { Check engine, radiator and belly pan for dirt - clean if necessary OM
{ { { { { { Check fuel filter water separator / drain if necessary OM
{ { { { { Drain fuel tank condensation and sediments - at least once a week OM
{ { { { Replace engine oil - at least once a year OM cd
{ { { Replace lube oil filter - at least once a year OM SM
{ { { Check radiator cap and fan OM SM
{ { { Replace coolant filter, check antifreeze / DCA4 percentage in coolant OM SM cd
{ { { Check condition and tension of V-belt OM SM
{ { { { Check oil, cooling and fuel system for leaks and condition OM SM
{ { { Check air intake and exhaust system for tightness and leaks OM SM
{ { Check oil pan and engine mounts for condition and tightness OM SM
{ { Check engine RPM - adjust if necessary SM e
{ { Check and adjust valve clearance - with cold engine SM e
{ { Check and service injection pump and potentiometer linkage OM SM
{ { PR 712B / 722B - Replace fuel pre- and fine filter elements - stage 1 and 2
{ { PR 732B / 742B / 752 - Check fuel prefilter strainer / clean if necessary OM
{ { PR 732B / 742B / 752 - Replace fuel filter cartridge OM
{ { Grease flywheel teeth SM
{ { Check flame glow plug system (before start of cold season) SM
Replace air filter elements - if necessary or at least once a year OM
Replace oil separator - every 2 years OM SM
Replace coolant with antifreeze and DCA4 - every 2 years OM SM cd
Check / adjust fuel injectors - if necessary or at least every 3000 operating hours SM e

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
{ { { { { { { Check oil level in hydraulic tank OM c
{ { { { Clean magnetic rod - daily up to 250 operating hours OM SM
Replace return oil filter element in hydraulic tank, OM
{ { { check all case drain filter inserts for deposits / contamination SM
{ { { Replace pressure filter (element) of the repl. circuit OM
Check attachment and travel hydraulic system for function and leaks,
{ { { { OM SM
check hydraulic hose routing for chafing
{ { { Drain hydraulic tank condensation and sediments (at least every 6 month) OM
{ { { Check hydraulic oil cooler for dirt / clean if necessary, check fan for condition OM
{ { { Check / adjust all hydraulic pressures according to adjustment checklist SM e
{ { { Check mountings and fittings for tight seating OM SM
Replace hydraulic oil (refill via tank filter) - at least every 4 years
{ - whenever environmentally safe hydraulic fluids are used OM cd
request / observe any special guidelines from manufacturer

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx-3084 5599
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx-3171 5599
Maintenance and PR 732 B F/N xxx-3136 5599
Datum Edition Date PR 742 B F/N xxx-3089 5599
PR 752 F/N xxx-2060 5599
01 00 Inspection Guidelines Blatt
Page
Feuille 3.2.14.01
Maintenance/Inspection
by Operating Hours
WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT

by maintenance personnel by authorized trained personnel


first and only maintenance interval OM Operation Manual
{ repeat maintenance interval SM Service Manual
every 8 - 10

every 1000
every 2000
at delivery

every 250
every 500
cfor correct oil level, use dipstick marks - for procedure and quantities, see OM
every 50

d for quality and viscosity guidelines see "Service fluids", SM - section 1.3
e for adjustment values, see data page entries in SM Reference Notes

SPLITTERBOX
{ { { { { Check oil level OM c
{ { { Replace gear oil - at least every 2 years OM cd

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
{ { { { { { { Check system functions incl. indicators and gauges OM SM
{ { { { Check battery electrolyte level OM c
{ { { Check, clean and grease battery terminals OM SM
{ { { Check wire routing and connections OM SM
{ { Check control system according to adjustment checklist / adjust as necessary SM e
{ { Check battery acid concentration / charge (before start of cold season) SM e

HEATER / FRESH AIR SYSTEM


{ { { { Check system for function and leaks OM SM
Replace fresh air filter - as necessary OM

TRAVEL GEAR
{ { { { Check oil level - clean magnetic plugs / magnetic rods OM c
{ { { Check bolts and nuts for tightness OM SM
{ { Replace gear oil - clean magnetic plugs / magnetic rods - at least every 4 years OM cd
{ { Replace lube oil from cone seal area - at least every 4 years OM cd

TRACK COMPONENTS
Check all bolts and nuts of track components,
{ { { OM SM
in particular at track pads and sprocket segments for tightness
{ { { Check carrier rollers, track rollers and idlers for leaks OM
{ { { { PR 752 - grease outer bearings of equalizer bar - shorten interval as necessary OM e
{ { { Check idler guides / adjust, replace parts as necessary OM SM e
{ PR 752 - check screws at the outer rings of support shafts for tight seating OM SM
{ Adjust chain tension to suit application - as necessary OM SM
Clean track components - as necessary OM
Check track components for wear - as necessary SM e

ATTACHMENTS
Check all cutting edges, corner shanks and ripper teeth for wear,
{ { { { { { { OM
check if attachments are suited to application
Grease all bearings including lift cylinder forks according to the lubrication chart
{ { { { { OM d
- shorten interval as necessary
{ { { Check all attachment bearings for play / wear OM SM e
{ { { { Check blade adjustment / centered to main frame - after every installation OM
{ { { Check bolts, nuts and pin safeties for tightness OM
{ { { Check attachments for damage OM

GENERAL
{ { { { Check entire machine for proper maintenance and condition OM SM
PR 752 - Grease door hinges on battery and oil cooler room - as necessary OM
Explain machine literature, in specially Operation Manual-safety guidelines
{ OM
to the operating personnel
Customer:............................................Mach.-Type...........F/N(PIN).........-..............Sm.-hours............Date............
Maintenance/Inspection
by Operating Hours
WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT

by maintenance personnel by authorized trained personnel


first and only maintenance interval OM Operation Manual
{ repeat maintenance interval SM Service Manual
every 8 - 10

every 1000
every 2000
at delivery

every 250
every 500 cfor correct oil level, use dipstick marks - for procedure and quantities, see OM
every 50

d for quality and viscosity guidelines see "Service fluids", SM - section 1.3
e for adjustment values, see data page entries in SM Reference Notes

DIESEL ENGINE
{ { { { { { { Check engine oil level and pressure OM c
{ { { { { { { Check coolant level OM c
{ { { { { { Check engine, radiator and belly pan for dirt - clean if necessary OM
{ { { { { { Check fuel filter water separator / drain if necessary OM
{ { { { { Drain fuel tank condensation and sediments - at least once a week OM
{ { { { Replace engine oil - at least once a year OM cd
{ { { Replace lube oil filter - at least once a year OM SM
{ { { Check radiator cap and fan OM SM
{ { { Replace coolant filter, check antifreeze / DCA4 percentage in coolant OM SM cd
{ { { Check condition and tension of V-belt OM SM
{ { { { Check oil, cooling and fuel system for leaks and condition OM SM
{ { { Check air intake and exhaust system for tightness and leaks OM SM
{ { Check oil pan and engine mounts for condition and tightness OM SM
{ { Check engine RPM - adjust if necessary SM e
{ { { Replace fuel prefilter - filter element OM
{ { Check and adjust valve clearance - with cold engine SM e
{ { Check and service injection pump and potentiometer linkage OM SM
{ { Replace fuel fine filter cartridge OM
{ { Grease flywheel teeth SM
{ { Check flame glow plug system (before start of cold season) SM
Replace air filter elements - if necessary or at least once a year OM
Replace oil separator - every 2 years OM SM
Replace coolant with antifreeze and DCA4 - every 2 years OM SM cd
Check / adjust fuel injectors - if necessary or at least every 3000 operating hours SM e

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
{ { { { { { { Check oil level in hydraulic tank OM c
{ { { { Clean magnetic rod - daily up to 250 operating hours OM SM
Replace return oil filter element in hydraulic tank, OM
{ { { check all case drain filter inserts for deposits / contamination SM
{ { { Replace pressure filter (element) of the replenishing circuit OM
Check attachment and travel hydraulic system for function and leaks,
{ { { { check hydraulic hose routing for chafing
OM SM
Drain hydraulic tank condensation and sediments (at least every 6 month)
{ { { - whenever environmentally safe hydraulic fluids are used drain once a week
OM

{ { { Check hydraulic oil cooler for dirt / clean if necessary, check fan for condition OM
{ { Check / adjust all hydraulic pressures according to adjustment checklist SM e
{ { { Check mountings and fittings for tight seating OM SM
Replace hydraulic oil (refill via tank filter) - at least every 4 years
{ - whenever environmentally safe hydraulic fluids are used OM cd
request / observe any special guidelines from manufacturer

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712B F/N xxx-5600
Mjfcifss! PR 722B F/N xxx-5600
Maintenance and PR 732B F/N xxx-5600
Datum Edition Date
PR 742B F/N xxx-5600
PR 752 F/N xxx-5600

01 03 Inspection Guidelines Blatt


Page 3.2.15.01
Feuille
Maintenance/Inspection
by Operating Hours
WORK TO BE CARRIED OUT

by maintenance personnel by authorized trained personnel


first and only maintenance interval OM Operation Manual
{ repeat maintenance interval SM Service Manual
every 8 - 10

every 1000
every 2000
at delivery

every 250
every 500

cfor correct oil level, use dipstick marks - for procedure and quantities, see OM
every 50

d for quality and viscosity guidelines see "Service fluids", SM - section 1.3
e for adjustment values, see data page entries in SM Reference Notes

SPLITTERBOX
{ { { { { Check oil level OM c
{ { { Replace gear oil - at least every 2 years OM cd

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
{ { { { { { { Check system functions incl. indicators and gauges OM SM
{ { { { Check battery electrolyte level OM c
{ { { Check, clean and grease battery terminals OM SM
{ { { Check wire routing and connections OM SM
{ { Check control system according to adjustment checklist / adjust as necessary SM e
{ { Check battery acid concentration / charge (before start of cold season) SM e

HEATER / FRESH AIR SYSTEM


{ { { { Check system for function and leaks OM SM
Replace fresh air filter - as necessary OM

TRAVEL GEAR
{ { { { Check oil level - clean magnetic plugs / magnetic rods OM c
{ { { Check bolts and nuts for tightness OM SM
{ { Replace gear oil - clean magnetic plugs / magnetic rods - at least every 4 years OM cd
{ { Replace lube oil from cone seal area / flush cone seal area - at least every 4 years OM cd

TRACK COMPONENTS
Check all bolts and nuts of track components,
{ { { in particular at track pads and sprocket segments for tightness
OM SM

{ { { Check carrier rollers, track rollers and idlers for leaks OM


{ { { { PR 752 - grease outer bearings of equalizer bar - shorten interval as necessary OM e
{ { { Check idler guides / adjust, replace parts as necessary OM SM e
{ PR 752 - check screws at the outer rings of support shafts for tight seating OM SM
{ Adjust chain tension to suit application - as necessary OM SM
Clean track components - as necessary OM
Check track components for wear - as necessary SM e

ATTACHMENTS
Check all cutting edges, corner shanks and ripper teeth for wear,
{ { { { { { { check if attachments are suited to application
OM
Grease all bearings including lift cylinder forks according to the lubrication chart
{ { { { { - shorten interval as necessary
OM d
{ { { Check all attachment bearings for play / wear OM SM e
{ { { { Check blade adjustment / centered to main frame - after every installation OM
{ { { Check bolts, nuts and pin safeties for tightness OM
{ { { Check attachments for damage OM

GENERAL
{ { { { Check entire machine for proper maintenance and condition OM SM
PR 752 - Grease door hinges on battery and oil cooler room - as necessary OM
Explain machine literature, in specially Operation Manual-safety guidelines
{ to the operating personnel
OM
1. General Guidelines

1.1. Documentation of work to be performed


All maintenance work is noted in the Maintenance and Inspection Guidelines for the subject machine model,
see group 3.2.
A detailed record of completed work can be made by checking off all completed items on a report form and
comparison with this list.
Record the values obtained during adjustment checks on the adjustment check list form for the corresponding
machine model, see group 3.5.
In addition, confirm the completion of the inspection / delivery in the machines inspection notebook, send the
appropriate service check to the applicable LIEBHERR representative. Remove the old sticker and attach the
next inspection sticker, which is also in the notebook, in a clearly visible location in the operators cab of the
machine.
Explain the set-up and contents of the machine literature to the operator. Emphasize the safety guidelines and
regulations and all necessary maintenance work to be carried out between inspections.

1.2. Safety Guidelines


When performing any maintenance, inspection or repair work, observe all appropriate safety guidelines as
outlined in group 1.2.01 and in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. In addition, observe all regional labors
laws and regulations, accident prevention regulations and all applicable local, state and national laws and
regulations.

1.3. Intervals
Never exceed the given maintenance and inspection intervals; they can be shortened, if necessary. For
example: replace the filters and drain the sediment in the fuel tank in case of contamination, clean the radiator
in case of contamination, replace the filters and change the oil during and after repairs, etc.

1.4. Oil samples


Any required oil samples must be taken directly from the component before changing the oil. Before taking
the oil sample, operate the machine to circulate the oil to distribute any existing concentration of particles and to
prevent incorrect test results due to deposits. To determine any residual contamination after the repair is
completed, take another sample shortly after putting the machine back in service.
Use the hand pump and take an oil sample from the center of the oil tank, do not overfill the oil sample
container. Replace the suction hose on the hand pump after taking an oil sample.
Fill out all forms to be submitted with the oil sample correctly and completely. Incorrect information can lead
to unnecessary measures or to the elimination of necessary procedures and cause unnecessary charges.
For further details, refer to the oil sample documentation.

1.5. Oils, filters and miscellaneous


If possible, always drain the oil at operating temperature. For that reason complete all work, which has to be
performed when the machine is cold first, such as adjusting the valves on the Diesel engine.
Change the oil filters after draining the oil and before adding new oil.
Before restarting the machine, bleed the system, as necessary. Turn the starter
for 10 - 15 seconds before starting the Diesel engine.
When possible, cut open the replaced filter cartridges and check them for
abnormal deposits. The type and amount of deposits can give clues about the
condition of the system and / or future problems.
Dispose of used oil, filters and other waste products in an environmentally
safe manner !

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Maintenance and Inspection LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Instructions Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.4.10.01
Use only original LIEBHERR spare part and supplies for all maintenance, inspection and repair work. If the
operator insists on the installation of other parts, inform the operator that this could cause potential loss of
warranty coverage; make sure to note this request and installation on the inspection report.
For tightening torques, refer to page 1.4.02. For torque instructions for track pad and sprocket segment
screws, refer to page 12.1.00.

2. Maintenance guidelines

2.1. Diesel engine maintenance


On new machines, make sure to observe the first oil and filter change interval, because corrosion inhibitors
have been added to the engine oil at the factory.

2.1.1 Change the lube oil filter


Loosen the filter cartridges with a filter band and unscrew them by hand.
Refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual for installation position.
Standing filters can also be removed with a suitable tool on the top of the
cartridges. The filters are designed to retain the oil in the filters!
'Hand-tighten' (30 Nm) the filter cartridges.

2.1.2 Check the radiator cap and fan


Radiator cap - Check the seal and function of the pressure relief valve. Replace the radiator cap, if necessary.
Note: Insufficient pressure in the cooling system increases formation of vapors and can damage the engine.
Check the fan for damage and make sure the distance between the fan and the radiator guard is the same on
all sides. Adjust the guard, if necessary.

2.1.3 Check / replace the coolant / antifreeze mixture / corrosion inhibitor - in cooling systems without coolant filter
Check the required percentage of antifreeze or corrosion inhibitor with an optical
densimeter - see Special Tools, page 2.1.30.01. The test procedure is
independent of the coolant temperature.
A line between light and dark on the right scale of the sight gauge shows the
protection value.
When using antifreeze / corrosion inhibitor, the lowest temperature for which
antifreeze protection is provided will be shown ( minus values above the 0 C
mark, protection should be provided to - 37 C). Refer to the user instructions
given by the manufacturer for further details.
If in certain exceptional cases, the system is filled only with corrosion
inhibitors, use the same scale to read the protection. Each -1C corresponds to
1% by volume of corrosion inhibitor (nominal value = 1%).
Replace the coolant containing antifreeze every 2 years. Replace all special
mixtures once a year. To drain the coolant from radiator and engine block, refer
to instructions given in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
See also group 1.3.01 - Service items, paragraph 1.3 - Coolant.
If required, check the coolant pump before refilling, see paragraph 2.1.11.

2.1.4 Check / replace coolant - antifreeze and DCA4 concentration - in cooling systems with a coolant filter
Check the DCA4 concentration before changing the coolant filter. Check for possible gel formation.
Use the DCA4 test kit CC2602M, see Special Tools, group 2.1 to check the system. The kit contains multi-
language test instructions and maintenance guidelines, which must be observed. Check the expiration date of
the test kit (example: "Use before Nov.1999").
If gel build up is found, drain the coolant and clean the system. Before refilling, check coolant / antifreeze
quality and specification. The antifreeze may not be out of date nor emit silicates.
Note: To prepare the coolant mixture, mix water first with the correct ratio of DCA4. Then add the required
quantity of antifreeze to the water - DCA4 mixture and mix thoroughly.
Replace the coolant with antifreeze and DCA4 every 2 years. Replace special coolant fluids every year. For
details on draining the coolant from radiator and engine block, refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
See also group 1.3.01 - Service items, paragraph 1.3 - Coolant.
If necessary, check the coolant pump before refilling, see 2.1.11.

2.1.5 V-belt - Check condition and tension

Check the belt tension manually, as outlined in the "Operation and


Maintenance Manual".
To check the V-belt tension with the Krikit test unit, (Id. No. 8122560),
refer to the Diesel Engine Manual.
Replace worn or brittle V-belts.
For details on adjusting and changing the belt, refer to the "Operation
and Maintenance Manual".

2.1.6 Check the oil, cooling and fuel systems as well as the intake and exhaust systems
Check the systems for leaks, damage and chafed hoses. Repair leaks immediately, tighten loose connections,
fittings and hose clamps. Replace chafed hoses or lines. Make sure they are routed properly to prevent
chafing and kinks.
Check the radiator mounts, change the radiator mounts, if necessary.
Check the air filter housing and filter elements in the housing to ensure they are seated tightly. If applicable,
replace damaged parts, seals and elements.

2.1.7 Checking the oil pan and engine mounts for tightness
Check the screws on the oil pan and engine mounts, retighten if necessary. For torque values, see group 1.4.
Check engine mounts, change engine mounts, if necessary. For torque values, see page 15.3.
Check other fittings and components, such as fuel injectors, to ensure they are tight.

2.1.8 Check / adjust engine RPM - Service mechanical linkage to injection pump and potentiometer
Check the RPMs when you check the electronic control system. See Adjustment checklist, group 3.5.
If the required high / low idle RPMs are not reached, adjust the stop screws on the engine throttle control in the
cab, adjust the routing / adjustment of the shut off and throttle control cable, check the neutral functions of
hydraulic systems, and - if necessary - check the adjustment of the injection pump - see group 17.4.
The engine RPMs can also be checked with an impulse tachometer (connect to a clear injection line), see
Special Tools, page 2.1.10.
Check the mechanical linkage to the injection pump and potentiometer for damage, check the ball joints for
wear. Replace any damaged or worn parts.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Maintenance and Inspection LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Instructions Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.4.10.02
2.1.9 Check / adjust valve clearance
Check and adjust valve clearance when the engine is cold (ambient temperature).
For valve clearance, firing order and cylinder location, see page 4.3.10.01. For further details and adjustment
instructions, refer to the Diesel Engine Manual.
Install the engine turning fixture, see Special Tools page 2.1.10 (see point 2.1.10) in place of the cover on
the flywheel housing.

2.1.10 Check / grease the flywheel teeth


Remove the cover from the flywheel housing and check the flywheel
teeth. Apply about 1 cm of grease in the visible tooth cavity. Reinstall
the cover.

Note: Whenever possible, use non-metallic based greases.


High metal or graphite content as well as too much grease
combined with metallic friction, can cause problems with
the RPM sensor signal.

2.1.11 Check the flame glow plug system - Replace the oil seperator - Check / test the fuel injectors - Check the
coolant pump
A defective flame glow plug system can impair the starting performance of the Diesel engine. For that
reason, check the system before the start of the cold season.
The diaphragm of the oil separator can leak due to aging or external damage and cause contamination
damage to the engine. Check the service time and replace old or damaged oil separators.
Check / test fuel injectors if there is any decrease in performance, if the engine runs rough, if you hear the
engine knocking, or if the exhaust is black.
If required, remove the cover on the coolant pump and check the axial play of the pump shaft with a dial
indicator. If the axial play 0.1 mm, change the coolant pump.
For further details, refer to the Diesel Engine Manual.

2.2. Inspect the hydraulic system

2.2.1 Clean the magnetic rod in the hydraulic tank


Check and clean the magnetic rod daily on new machines and after repairs until you find only a minute amount
of particles. Check the magnetic rod at regular intervals. Any increase in particles indicate abnormal wear.

2.2.2 Check / replace the return filter elements


Replace the main return filter elements installed in the hydraulic tank.
Check all case drain filters on travel pumps, motors and attachment pump for contamination.
If any deposits are found, determine their origin and cause. Repair or replace components, as necessary.
Replace case drain filters.

2.2.3 Check the working and the travel hydraulic system for function and leaks / check hose routing and check
hoses for chafting, check mountings and fittings for tightness
Actuate all travel and working functions, check for problems.
Check the actuating disc, plunger and universal joint of the working hydraulic joysticks for wear, lubricate
lightly and adjust, as necessary. For details, refer to page 8.5.01.02. Proceed the same way for pilot controls
for added attachments.
To check the accumulator (safety control) for the working hydraulic (except for on RL machines), start the
Diesel engine and raise the front attachment. Shut off the engine (turn ignition key again to position 1) and
leave the safety lever in raised position. Actuate the ' attachment down' function quickly and several times. If
the attachment can be lowered less than 4 times, the accumulator is defective or there is excessive leakage in
the system.
Check hoses and lines for leaks, make sure there are no kinks. Check
for chafing. Replace chafed, sweaty (brittle) and old hoses! See safety
guidelines, page 1.2.01.07.
Do not route control, leak oil and tank lines and hoses together with high
pressure hoses, do not route them over sharp corners, edges or hose
fittings.
Check connections for leaks and replace seal rings, as necessary.

Check piston rods for damage, check piston rod bearings for leaks. Repair, as necessary.
Check mounting screws on hydraulic components (pumps, motors, tank, etc.) as well as flange connections
for tightness. Retighten, if necessary.

2.2.4 Check / adjust all hydraulic pressures


Carry out pressure checks / adjustments according to adjustment checklist for the corresponding machine
model - see group 3.5 - and record the results.
For further details, data and instructions, refer to the quick reference for the adjustment checklist or the
appropriate section in the Service Manual.

2.3. Inspect the electrical system

2.3.1 Check the function of the system including indicators and gauges
Turn on all electrical functions and test all indicators and gauges on the instrument panel, as outlined in the
"Operation and Maintenance Manual".
In case of problems, check fuses and / or cables. Refer to the corresponding schematics in group 9..

2.3.2 Clean / check / grease the battery connections, check the cable routing and connections

Check the battery terminals and cable clamps for corrosion and
tightness. Clean and grease the clamps and terminals at regular
intervals. Check the batteries for external damage and leaks.
Check the battery cable harness for chafing, check connections for
corrosion. If chafed areas have been found, wrap them with electrical
tape, reroute them and shrink fit the cable harness to prevent moisture
infiltration.

2.3.3 Check / adjust the electronic control system


On machines with electronic crawler control / E-box version CEP, use the test box to check and adjust the
system, as outlined in group 10.4..
On machines with electronic crawler control / E-box version RST , use a notebook computer and the LIKOM
Service Set, as outlined in group 10.5.
Perform all checks / adjustments according to the adjustment checklist for the corresponding machine model
- see group 3.5 - and record the results.
For special tools, refer to page 2.1.30.01.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Maintenance and Inspection LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Instructions Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.4.10.03
2.3.4 Check the battery electrolyte level (charge condition)
Use an optical battery charge tester to check the electrolyte level, see Special Tools, page 2.1.30.01.
The tester displays a line between light and dark on the left scale of the window,
which means:
GOOD = battery charged
FAIR = battery half charged
RECHARGE = battery discharged
Check the battery acid before adding water. Perform a separate test for each
battery cell.
If test values are the same for all cells, below 1200, the battery must be re- charged
with an external battery charger. If the test values vary (difference is greater than
0.02), or if they are below 1.100, the battery must be replaced.
Note: Disconnect the negative ( - ) terminal first, then disconnect the
positive terminal ( +) ; connect the positive + terminal first, then
connect the negative terminal ( - ).
For further details on the use of the battery charge tester or on the charging
procedure, refer to the manufacturers instructions.
Caution : Battery acid is highly corrosive! Handle the battery very carefully, always wear safety glasses and
gloves. There is a danger of explosion in case of sparks! Make sure to strictly observe all safety
guidelines!

2.4. Inspect the heater, ventilation and air conditioner

2.4.1 Check the system for function and for leaks


Check all heater and fresh air functions and/or cooling function, if an air conditioner is installed. For further
details, see Operation and Maintenance Manual.
In case of heater problems, check the connections of the input and return lines, check for leaks. See group
17.3.
For maintenance / malfunctions on air conditioners, call an air conditioning technician. For details, see group
17.5 and/or "Operation and Maintenance Manual".

2.5. Inspect the travel gear

2.5.1 Check screws for tightness


Check all mounting screws for tightness, torque as necessary. For tightening torques, see page 1.4.02.01.
Note: If the oil level is too high, the disk brake or travel motor seals may be leaking. On gears with two
(2) life time seals, check the oil level (oil volume) in the seal chamber, open gears if necessary
and check the inner life time seal (seal chamber is filled with hydraulic oil SAE 20, see Operation
and Maintenance Manual).
Remove the gear cover and check hoses and flange connections for leaks.
2.6. Inspect the track components

2.6.1 Check screws and nuts for tightness


This inspection is especially important on new track components. Loose
track pad screws can also be detected by offset nuts..
Replace loose screws and retorque them. For safety reasons , retorque
similar screw connections on the affected part as well.
For torque specifications on track pad and sprocket segment screws,
refer to page 12.1.00.01. For all other screws, use tightening torques
given in section 1.4.

2.6.2 Check / adjust idler guides


For check and adjustment details, refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Incorrectly adjusted idler
guides will lead to idler damage!
If the idler guide can no longer be properly adjusted due to excessive
wear, replace worn parts.
Wear strips for vertical play are attached to the inside of the roller
frame and on the claws of the idler guide by tack welding or with
screws.
If new wear strips are installed and shims are intended to be installed,
replace missing shims under the screw heads / covers for subsequent
adjustments.
If there are no more shims for the lateral play adjustment, replace or
recondition the guide plates and add new shims, if the design calls for
them, for subsequent adjustments.
For details about idler guides for various machine types, refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual or
group 12.4.

2.6.3 PR 752 - Check screws of the support shaft mounting for tightness
Demount wire guard1. Tighten the screws2 of the support shaft
crosswise up to the required torque- see section 1.4.02.
Note: It is possible that the ring doesnt run in smooth. So repeat
this action at least twice with different begins to reach the
required screw torque for a long time.

2.6.4 Adjust the track chain tension to the job application, check the track
components for wear
Chain tension must be adjusted to suit the actual job application, since different ground conditions result in
different material accumulation, but the slack should always be the same. If chains are tightened too much,
track wear is significantly increased.
Stop the machine in forward direction on level ground. The track chain tension is correct when the slack
between the carrier roller and the idler or carrier roller and sprocket is approx. 40 to 60 mm, depending on
track design.
The track guards must be selected according to the working conditions, see page 12.2.00.04, paragraph 3.3.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Maintenance and Inspection LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Instructions Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.4.10.04
For track wear inspection, measuring guidelines, wear data (wear chart) and evaluation of wear patterns
and causes, see group 12.2.
When checking the track components, always visually inspect the elastic bearings on support shafts and
the equalizer bar.

2.7. Inspect the attachment

2.7.1 Check all bearings for play / wear


To check the bearing play at the trunion, apply pressure upward or
downward to one side and check the play with a feeler gauge or similar
tool on the opposite site. A minimum play must be present, as soon as
the maximum wear limit is reached, replace worn parts.
Permissible play = min.0.5 mm max. 4.0 mm
Check the crawler's center bearing on the push frame to ensure it is
correctly mounted and adjusted, see page 13.2.10.01 and/or the
Operation and Maintenance Manual, chapter Blade installation.

To check the radial play on cylindrical pin bushings, move the


attachment vertically to the bolt axis and measure the play with a ruler.
Replace excessively worn parts. Measure the axial play with feeler
gauge or similar tool. If play is excessive, add shims.
Pull or push the pipe layer reverse roller bearing at one point and
check the play on the opposite side with feeler gauge or similar tool.
Replace worn parts.
Permissible radial play = max. 2.0 mm,
Permissible axial play = max. 3.0 mm,
Note: Cylindrical mounted hydraulic cylinders must be able to
move freely in axial direction up to approx. 5 mm. Do
not add shims.

Crawler loaders - Check oil filled bucket pin bearings for leaks,
correct mounting and possible wear. Replace leaking or worn bucket
pin bearings.
Permissible radial play without leakage and/or dry = up to max.
2.0 mm.

When necessary, point out proper attachment selection to match application, i.e.
on crawler dozers: straight corners for precision dozing, HP cutting edge for severe applications, side
cutters, correct ripper tooth configuration, etc.
on crawler loaders: bucket type (rock or standard bucket), proper bucket and ripper tooth configuration,
etc.
2.7.2 Crawler loaders - bucket stops and limit switch adjustment

With the bucket fully tilted in and in its lowest position, there
must be a min. of 5 mm distance between the bucket and the
linkage, and the bucket must touch the stops on both sides
evenly.
With the bucket fully raised (limit switch disabled) and fully
tilted out, the linkage must touch the stop, the back of the
bucket may touch the stops (bucket unloaded).
Replace worn stops as outlined in group 13.2.
Hoist and bucket limit switches must be adjusted to suit
application and to aid the operator. See "Operation and
Maintenance Manual".

2.7.3 Pipe layer - hoist gear - cable winch


For further details on maintenance and inspection as well as important safety recommendations, refer to group
14, the winch manufacturers instructions and the "Operation and Maintenance Manual".

2.7.4 Pipe layer - function free fall device


Caution: Secure machine and working area. The free fall area of the load has to be free. Observe safety
guidelines.
Lift a suitable test load with a weight of appr. 1500 kg with the hoist gear and actuate the free fall device. The
load has to drop down faster than normal lowering.
Note: for attaching loads and actuating the free fall device, observe all guidelines of the machine
reflected operation manuals.

2.8. General inspection procedures


If any maintenance problems have been found, discuss the correct procedures with maintenance personnel.
If possible, check for possible operational errors and advise the machine operator, as necessary.
If additional measures, maintenance or inspections for special attachments are required, make sure to carry
them out and record them on the inspection report.
Determine any spare parts requirements or any expected repairs, discuss with and inform the appropriate
personnel.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss! PR Litronic
Maintenance and Inspection LR Litronic
Datum Edition Date
RL Litronic

01 04 Instructions Blatt
Page
Feuille
3.4.10.05
Customer - Name and address: Machine type: PIN: - Sm-hrs.: Date:

Job application/ location:

Checked by:

from company:

A. Tests with standard test instruments - test with Diesel engine RPM at n-max
Test Test Test points Nominal Test value Remarks
No. value actual value adjusted value
1. Visual tests and maintenance o.k. remarks o.k. remarks fluids, filters, mech. components, etc.
Hydraulic system
2. Operating-
70 C
10
temperature hydraulic tank C C must remain constant during all tests
3. Cold start valve - theoretic checked: changed: - at PR 712 to PR 732 - only if necessary
25 bar
1
replenishing circuit SD (ND) yes no yes no - for test / adjustment see guidelines
18+ bar
7
4. Servo pressure ND bar -- working hydraulic
+1
5. Stand by pressure 20 bar bar bar PR 712 to 732 (A10V-without stand-by valve)
working hydr.
25+ bar
1
bar bar PR 732 (A10V-with stand-by valve)
HD
+5
30 bar bar bar PR 742 (HPR 130)
6. Pressure limitation
210 bar
5
6.1 Sec. pressure working hydr. bar bar lift cylinder circuit
190 bar
5
6.2 Prim. pressure HD bar bar
5
6.3 Pressure cut off 160 bar bar bar max. working pressure
6.4 bar bar bar pressure settings for optional
6.5 bar bar bar hydraulic functions
6.6 bar bar bar
14+ bar
6
7. Pressure working hydr. bar bar in fine control range/PR 742(HPR) adjust
difference = p HD to LD <13 bar bar bar when spool is fully shifted
8. Accumulator test min. 4x possible actuation after engine is turned off
+4
9. Replenishing SP 16 bar bar PR 712 to PR 732
pressure travel hydr. 3
25 bar bar PR 742
50 bar
5
10. Control pressure ST bar PR 742 only
11. Hydr. neutral pos. shaft right M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
travel hydraulic M1 + M2 1 bar M2 bar bar pump right
shaft left M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
M1 + M2 1 bar M2 bar bar pump left
+30/-10
12. Max. pressure M1 right 420 re bar bar check only if necessary
travel forward M1 left bar li bar bar use test flanges!
+30/-10 max. engine RPM is 1400 Upm
Max. pressure M2 right 420 re bar bar
travel reverse M2 left bar li bar bar

B. Test with test box CET 08/03 H (see SM - section 10.4) and adapter CET 14/03 or CET 14/05
- mark LED which lights up or note position of analog indicator (space No. = at test box, A = at adapter)
- test with Diesel engine RPM at max. RPM or as noted -
LED - color: = green = yellow = red indicators =
Test Test Space During test After adjustment / repair Remarks
No. No.
Diesel engine is not running
1. Identification A/6 Inl.6 V6/Inl.4 752/X..... Inl.6 V6/Inl.4 752/X..... record denomination of LED
2. Battery 8 o.k. undervolt. o.k. undervolt. after approx. 10 sec. of actuation
3. Indicator light 9 light at panel on: yes light at panel on: yes light at panel = on instrument panel of machine
electron. fault ind. no no ("reduced speed" light lights together)
4. Signal red. speed. 9 no signal no signal select reduced travel speed range
5. Signal counter rot. 9 signal error signal error press button and deflect joystick in all directions
6. Travel joystick 4 good good = analogic display of sections
defect defect
7. Proportional 11 after approx. 10 sec. of actuation
solenoids

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712 F/N xxx-0103 0384
Mjfcifss! PR 722 F/N xxx-0103 0563
PR 732 F/N xxx-2003 2500
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 F/N xxx-2001 2500

01 01 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.00.01
Feuille
Test Test Space During test After adjustment / repair Remarks
No. No.
Diesel engine running
8. Alternator 8 overv. o.k. underv. overv. o.k. underv. Diesel engine approx. 1500 RPM / test for 10 sec.
9. RPM sensor A low o.k. high low o.k. high must be green from nmin up to nmax
Diesel engine
+50
10. RPM 2 min: max: min: max: min: 800 Rpm
+80
Diesel engine max: PR 712 / 722 2100 Rpm
...............- Rpm -................. ...............- Rpm -................. +60
PR 732 / 742 1900 Rpm
11. Potentiometer 3 {max.-.....Rpm good {max.-.....Rpm good
+20
should be green at nmax -30 RPM and
nominal RPM {min.+.....Rpm defect {min.+.....Rpm defect
+20
nmin +30 RPM / = indication at part. range
12. Brake 14 light at on light at on
release must be functioning for all remaining tests
panel: off panel: off
Tracks running machine must be raised off the ground
13. RPM sensor 13 right right = no indication /
oil motors left left must be "ok" for further tests
14. Basic adjustment 14 forward 2 forward 2 pump regulating range forward
left track
forward 3 forward 3 pump end of regulating forward
- only if required - reverse 2 reverse 2 pump regulating range reverse
at PR 742 pos. 3 reverse 3 reverse 3 pump end of regulating reverse
before pos. 2 forward 4 forward 4 motor regulating range forward
forward 5 forward 5 control tests -
reverse 4 reverse 4 values are resulting from
reverse 5 reverse 5 previous adjustments
15. Straight run 14 Test Adjust Adjust note position of rotary switch
compare track right
forward 1 yes no forward 1 yes no travel begin forward - tracks start to turn
to track left
forward 2 forward 2 pump regulating range forward
at PR 742 pos. 3 forward 3 forward 3 pump end of regulating forward
before pos. 2 reverse 1 yes no reverse 1 yes no travel begin reverse - tracks start to turn
reverse 2 reverse 2 pump regulating range reverse
reverse 3 reverse 3 pump end of regulating reverse
forward 4 forward 4 motor regulating range forward
forward 5 forward 5 control tests -
reverse 4 reverse 4 values are resulting from
reverse 5 reverse 5 previous adjustments
Special tests - travel operation throttle lever must be at max. RPM position
16. Current supply (440 )
20
2 mA initial current jump
PR 712 - 1000 mA, PR 722 - 990 mA
50 50
max. mA
16.1 Diesel engine
PR 732 - 980 mA, PR 742 - 960 mA
50 50
in reduced speed range
not running
PR 712 - 1450 mA, PR 722 - 1445 mA
70 70
max. mA
PR 732 - 1410 mA, PR 742 - 1380 mA
70 70
in normal speed range
60
(1180 ) mA reduced value when steering left
(440 )
20
16.2 Diesel engine mA initial current jump
running (590 )
30
mA minimum current at maximum load (RPM drop)
17. Straight run 14 | mA | mA forward with approx. 550 mA
compare track right +2 | mA | mA reverse with approx. 550 mA
to track left
| mA | mA forward with approx. 950 mA
| mA | mA reverse with approx. 950 mA

Remarks:
Adjustment guidelines - quick reference and explanations
Complete the test procedure according to the checklist, even for a partial check. Use pressure gauges appropriate
for the test ranges. To test the track speed / straight run, raise the machine off the ground and support it properly, so
that the chains can turn freely without danger.
Make sure to observe all safety guidelines - see group 1.2.01!
Use only the correct tools (test instruments). The Diesel engine RPMs must be as noted. Perform all required
maintenance work before adjustment.
In case of questions, make sure to use the detailed instructions: for the adjustment of the travel hydraulic, see
section 6.5.00, for the adjustment of the working hydraulic, see section 7.5.10 and for the use of the test box CET
08/03, see section 10.4.00
When putting the machine into service, proceed according to the guidelines given in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Check all indicators and gauges to ensure they are functioning correctly.
Defects must be repaired immediately or as soon as possible, depending on the type of problem.

A. Tests with standard test instruments


All pressure tests must be performed at max. engine RPM unless noted otherwise.

1. Visual tests and maintenance


Insufficient maintenance and mechanical component defects often point to the cause of the problem. Check oil
levels, filters, coolant level, mechanical components and their mounting, cables and wiring harnesses, etc.
Repair any detected defects immediately or as soon as possible, depending on the type of problem.

2. Operating temperature
If the operating temperature is reached only for a short time, cover the cooler (air flow) partially for the test /
adjustment. With the oil at operating temperature, before performing additional tests, actuate all hydraulic
functions and monitor the temperature constantly. For additional information about bringing the hydraulic system
to operating temperature, see group 6.5 or 7.5.

3. Cold start valve (travel hydraulic)


Needs to be checked only for troubleshooting (example: in case of temperature problems). Valve should be
closed, with the oil at operating temperature (also valid for by-pass valve on PR 742). Check adjustment, see
group 6.5, p. 3.

4. Servo pressure (working hydraulic)


Not adjustable - is a result of SP pressure. In case of problems, for example Quick drop, see Adjustment -
Working hydraulic, group 7.5.10.

5. Stand-by pressure (working hydraulic)


This pressure is the basis for the proper function of the entire working hydraulic system.
Note: - Only the new A10V100 pumps in PR732 are equipped with the stand-by valve (which is installed
between the regulator and the pump housing). The adjustment on all A10V-pumps is made on the LS
regulator.
- The test value on PR 742 with regulating pump HPR 130 depends significantly on the temperature,
the adjustment must be made via the Qmin stop on the pump.

6. Pressure limitation (working hydraulic)

6.1. Secondary pressure


To check, raise the pressure cut off and primary pressure setting. For the blade down function, block the line.
Note the secondary pressure relief setting for additional attachments separately on the checklist.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712 F/N xxx-0103 0384
Mjfcifss! PR 722 F/N xxx-0103 0563
Quick Reference PR 732 F/N xxx-2003 2500
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 F/N xxx-2001 2500

01 01 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.00.02
Feuille
6.2. Primary pressure
To check, raise the pressure cut off setting. Check the pressure via the tilt circuit or additional attachments.

6.3. Pressure cut off


The pressure cut off limits the maximum working pressure, primary and secondary pressure relief valves are
installed for system safety. Check the pressure with the primary pressure via the tilt circuit or additional
attachment circuit.

6.4. Blank line for pressure setting of additional attachment (enter description/test points)

6.5. Blank line for pressure setting of additional attachment (enter description/test points)

6.6. Blank line for pressure setting of additional attachment (enter description/test points)

7. Pressure difference -p HD to LD (working hydraulic)


The p pressure in the fine control range is obtained on the machines with regulating pump A10V = PR 712, PR
722, PR 732 from the setting of the stand-by pressure. On machines with HPR 130 regulating pumps = PR742,
the LS-regulator must be adjusted separately.
The drop of p with the control valve spools fully opened is necessary to obtain the shortest working cycles.

8. Accumulator (working hydraulic)


For safety reasons, it must be possible to actuate a function (blade down) several times (within 3 minutes) after
the Diesel engine is turned off.

9. Replenishing pressure ( travel hydraulic)


If the pressure is too low, find and remedy the problem before continuing machine operation.

10. Control pressure (travel hydraulic PR 742)


The existing pressure value depends on the valve adjustment and the replenishing pressure, see schematic,
group 6.

11. Hydraulic neutral position (travel hydraulic - travel pumps)


Leave the safety lever in the down position. Check first with 0-600 bar pressure gauge, for final check /
adjustment, use a 0- 40 / 0-60 bar pressure gauge.
The normal pressure reading should correspond to the replenishing pressure. The permissible pressure
difference between M1 and M2 may be no more than 1.0 bar.

12. Pressure limitation of maximum system pressure (travel hydraulic)


Not adjustable. Check only if needed. Check O-rings on blind flanges. Determine location of test points M1/M2 ,
depending on the type of travel gear.
All work must be performed clean and carefully. Actuate the pumps carefully and hold the maximum pressure
only for a short time. Bleed the system after tests.

B. Tests with test box CET 08 / 03


Before carrying out tests / adjustments, check the operational readiness and function of the LED on the test box
and its adapter- see 10.4.
LED = light emitting diode

1. Identification
For identification, the indicators on the adapter and the test box have to be combined.
In case of incorrect identification, check the operating condition of test box first - for example: check the rotary
switch position and the cable configuration, then check the machine wire harness connections.

2. Battery
If the battery is always at undervoltage, check the position of the safety lever and the emergency shut off button
first, then continue to check the power supply.
3. Indicator lights - electronic fault indicator- H12
If there is a problem in the system, the time the indicator light lights up can give an initial hint to the problem area.
Along with the electronic monitoring indicator light, the 'reduced speed range' indicator light H11 lights up as well.
If these lights do not light up during the test, check the bulbs, wiring and relays.

4. Signal - preselection "reduced speed range"


If the LED does not light up during the test, check the switch and wiring.

5. Signal - counter rotation


If the LED does not light up during the test, or if it turns off during joystick deflection, check the wiring as well as
the switch and cable in the joystick.

6. Travel joystick
The pointers in the test box must follow the joystick deflection evenly. Erratic movement or lack of movement
indicates an error and should be noted as such on the checklist.
In the four main directions, at full joystick deflection, the corresponding green LED must light up. In diagonal
deflection, most of the time both directional LEDs light up, a jump", however, is within the permitted tolerance
range.
The red error" diode may not light up in any joystick position.

7. Proportional solenoids
Push the push button for about 15 seconds. If an error is shown, swap the connectors at the proportional
solenoids and check again to find the problem - cable or solenoid.

8. Alternator
In case of constant low voltage, always check the position of the safety lever and the emergency shut off button,
then continue to check the power supply.
Push the push button for about 15 seconds. If the green LED turns off and the red one lights up, check the
alternator or V-belt.

9. RPM sensor - Diesel engine


Readings at the test box adapter are valid.
In case of error indication, remove the sensor and check it visually and/or clean. Check the harness and adjust
required distance to the top of the flywheel tooth. Repeat the test.

10. Diesel engine RPM


Readings at the test box are valid.
If values are too low, check function and routing of shut off cable, even check the neutral functions of the
hydraulic system. Make adjustments on the stop screws of the engine operation in the cab and when necessary
check adjustment of the injection pump - see chapter 17.4.
If engine RPM is changed via a lever, the springs may not be fully compressed in any position.

11. Potentiometer
The pointer in the test box must follow the throttle position evenly. Jerky movement or lack of movement
indicates a defect and should be noted as such on the checklist.
Approach test values of potentiometer adjustment from the medium RPM range of the Diesel engine. Determine
the difference between the high and low idle (step 10) to those engine speeds and record the RPM where the
corresponding LED just lights up (not flicker). If necessary, repeat the test several times. The nominal value
should be within 30 RPM each.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712 F/N xxx-0103 0384
Mjfcifss! PR 722 F/N xxx-0103 0563
Quick Reference PR 732 F/N xxx-2003 2500
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 F/N xxx-2001 2500

01 01 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.00.03
Feuille
12. Release the brake
When the LED lights up on the test box, the indicator light H4 on the panel must turn off.
LED does not light up electrical defect
Indicator light does not turn off hydraulic / mechanical defect
Caution: If step A-11 was not carried out at all or carried out incorrectly, the chains may already begin to turn.

13. RPM sensor - hydraulic motors


Test read out usually starts in speed range 3, however, perform the test always in stage 5 (higher signal
number). Before changing from left right", stop the track run, switch over and run again.
No indication Problem due to electrical circuit interruption, possible total sensor failure
Mark appropriate square on check list
Red diode Sensor sends error signal

14. Basic adjustment - left track


The speed of the left track is shown in relation to the stored values in the test box. Carry out the required
adjustment corrections until the analog indicator is in the green - center" range, even after several checks.
Beachte: - The pump control / adjustment depends on the type of travel gear installed.
- If surging" occurs in a speed range, set the corresponding regulating range (= adjustment stage 4,
or stage 2 and 4, or stage 2) to the end of the left (slower) green range.
- If an existing adjustment is changed, change the adjustment to the required direction until indication
is in the red range during the next test run. Then return the adjustment to the required green range.
- Always make adjustment changes after the chain stops turning.

15. Straight run, right chain compared to the left chain


The speed of the right chain is shown in relation to the speed of the left chain, measured via the speed sensors
of the travel motors.
If no basic adjustment of the left track was made as noted in par. 14, only minor corrections may be made. But in
all speed ranges the faster chain has to be matched to the slower chain.
If the basic adjustment of the left track was made as noted in par. 14, the right track is matched to the left track.
A normal test run can be carried out in the switch position Test". For adjustments, every test run must be made
in the switch position Adjust". Correct adjustments until the analog indicator is in the green - center" range,
even after several test runs.
Note: - If an existing adjustment is changed, change the adjustment to the required direction until the
indication is in the red range during the test run. Then return the adjustment to the required
green range.
- For the simulation of the required engine load, see paragraph 10.4.

16. Current supply (Special test during normal travel - test box with Y-cable)
This test is only required when troubleshooting. Only the current supply on the right track is measured.
Additional indications are due to the switch design and have no meaning.
Notes: - If the maximum values are not reached, check the position of the throttle control lever.
- For the simulation of the required engine load, see paragraph 10.4.

17. Straight run, right chain to left chain (Special test during normal travel - test box with Y-cable)
Perform this test only if the machine cannot be raised off the ground and properly supported.
During normal travel operation, the current supply to the right drive side and the speed of the right track in
relation to the speed of the left track is shown. Due to external influences, despite a wide tolerance range, large
deviations (fluctuating) exist.
Additional indications are due to the switch design and have no meaning.
Customer - Name and address: Machine type: PIN: - Sm-hrs.: Date:

Job application/ location:

Checked by:

from company:

A Tests with standard test instruments - test with Diesel engine RPM at 1000 RPM
Test Test Test points Nominal Test value Remarks
No. value actual value adjusted value
1. Visual test and maintenance o.k. remarks o.k. remarks fluids, filters, mech. components, etc..
Hydraulic system
2. Operating
must remain constant during all tests
70 C
10
temperature hydraulic tank C C
3. Cold start valve - theoretic checked: changed: - at PR 712 to PR 732B - only if necessary
25 bar
1
replenishing circuit SD (ND) yes no yes no - for test / adjustment see guidelines
18+ bar
7
4. Servo pressure ND bar -- working hydraulic
+1
5. Stand by pressure 20 bar bar bar PR 712 to 732 (A10V-without stand-by valve)
working hydr
25+ bar
1
bar bar PR 732 (A10V-with stand-by valve)
HD

6. Pressure limitation
220 bar
6.1 Prim. pressure 5
working hydr. bar bar
210 bar
5
6.2 Sec. pressure HD bar bar lift cylinder circuit
5
6.3 Pressure cut off 160 bar bar bar max. working pressure
6.4 bar bar bar pressure settings for optional
6.5 bar bar bar hydraulic functions
6.6 bar bar bar
14+ bar
6
7. Pressure working hydr bar bar in fine control range (check only if necessary)
difference = p HD to LD <13 bar bar bar when spool is fully shifted
8. Accumulator test min. 4x possible actuation after engine is turned off
+4
9. Replenishing SP 16 bar bar PR 712 to PR 732B
pressure travel hydr. 3
25 bar bar PR 742B
50 bar
5
10. Control pressure ST bar PR 742B up to F/Nxxx-5233 only
11. Hydr. neutral pos. Shaft right M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
travel hydraulic M1 + M2 1 bar M2 bar bar pump right
Shaft left M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
M1 + M2 1 bar M2 bar bar pump left
+30/-10
12. Max. pressure M1 right 420 ri bar bar check only if necessary
travel forward M1 left bar le bar bar use test flanges!
+30/-10
Max. pressure M2 right 420 ri bar bar
travel reverse M2 left bar le bar bar

B. Test with test box CET 08/03 H (see SM - section 10.4) and adapter CET 14/03 or CET 14/05
- mark LED which lights up or note position of analog indicator (space No. = at test box, A = at adapter)
- test with Diesel engine RPM at max. RPM or as noted -
LED - color: = green = yellow = red indicators =
Test Test Space During test After adjustment / repair. Remarks
No. No.
Diesel engine is not running
1. Identification A/6 Inl.6 V6/Inl.4 752/X..... Inl.6 V6/Inl.4 752/X..... record denomination of LED
2. Battery 8 o.k. undervolt. o.k. undervolt. after approx. 10 sec. of actuation
3. Indicator light 9 light at panel on: yes light at panel on: yes light at panel = on instrument panel of machine
electron. fault ind. no no ("reduced speed" light lights together)
4. Signal 9 no signal no signal 2-ranges -normal range 3-ranges - normal = III
travel speed -
range selection no signal no signal - select "red. speed range" - red. speed range II
no signal no signal -- - red. speed range I
5. Signal counter rot. 9 signal error signal error press button and deflect joystick in all directions
6. Travel joystick 4 good good = analogic display of sections
defect defect
7. Proportional 11 after approx. 10 sec. of actuation
solenoids

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0385 5599
Mjfcifss! PR 722(B) F/N xxx-0564 5599
PR 732 B F/N xxx-2501 5599
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-2501 5599

01 03 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.01.01
Feuille
Test. Test Space During test After adjustment / repair Remarks
No. No.
Diesel engine running
8. Alternator 8 overv. o.k. underv. overv. o.k. underv. Diesel engine approx. 1500 RPM / test for 10 sec.
9. RPM sensor A low o.k. high low o.k. high must be green from nmin up to nmax
Diesel engine
+50
10. RPM 2 min: max: min: max: min: 800 RPM
+80
Diesel engine max: PR 712 / 722 2100 RPM
...............- RPM -................. ...............- RPM -................. +80
PR 732 / 742 1900 RPM
11. Potentiometer 3 {max.-.....RPM good {max.-.....RPM good
+20
should be green at nmax -30 RPM and
nominal RPM {min.+.....RPM defect {min.+.....RPM defect
+20
nmin +30 RPM / = indication at part. range
12. Brake release 14 light at on light at on
must be functioning for all remaining tests
panel: off panel: off
Tracks running machine must be raised off the ground
13. RPM sensor 13 right right = no indication /
oil motors left left must be "ok" for further tests
14. Basic adjustment 14 forward 2 forward 2 pump regulating range forward
left track
forward 3 forward 3 pump end of regulating forward
- only if required - reverse 2 reverse 2 pump regulating range reverse
at PR 742 up to reverse 3 reverse 3 pump end of regulating reverse
F/Nxxx-5233 forward 4 forward 4 motor regulating range forward
pos. 3 before pos. 2
forward 5 forward 5 control tests -
reverse 4 reverse 4 values are resulting from
reverse 5 reverse 5 previous adjustments
15. Straight run 14 Test Adjust Adjust note position of rotary switch
compare track right
forward 1 yes no forward 1 yes no travel begin forward - tracks start to turn
to track left
forward 2 forward 2 pump regulating range forward
at PR 742 up to forward 3 forward 3 pump end of regulating forward
F/Nxxx-5233 reverse 1 yes no reverse 1 yes no travel begin reverse - tracks start to turn
pos. 3 before pos. 2
reverse 2 reverse 2 pump regulating range reverse
reverse 3 reverse 3 pump end of regulating reverse
forward 4 forward 4 motor regulating range forward
forward 5 forward 5 control tests -
reverse 4 reverse 4 values are resulting from
reverse 5 reverse 5 previous adjustments
Special tests - travel operation throttle lever must be at max. RPM position
16. Current supply (440 )
20
2 mA initial current jump
2-ranges 3-ranges
max. mA
16.1 Diesel engine PR 712 - 1450+70 mA, PR 712 - 1450+70mA
not running
in normal speed range PR 722 - 1445+70 mA PR 722 - 1445+70 mA
(switch position III) PR 732 - 1410+70 mA, PR 732 - 1410+70 mA
PR 742 - 1380+70 mA PR 742 - 1380+70 mA
max. mA PR 712 - 100050 mA PR 712 - 1240+50 mA
in reduced speed range PR 722 - 99050 mA PR 722 - 1235+50 mA
PR 732 - 98050 mA PR 732 - 1230+50 mA
(switch position II) PR 742 - 96050 mA PR 742 - 1200+50 mA
max. mA -- PR 712 - 910+50 mA
in reduced speed range PR 722 - 900+50 mA
PR 732 - 890+50 mA
(switch position I) PR 742 - 880+50 mA
(1180 )
80
mA reduced value when steering left (normal range)
20
16.2 Diesel engine (440 ) mA initial current jump
running (500+
100
) mA minimum current at maximum load (RPM drop)
17. Straight run 14 | mA | mA forward with approx. 550 mA
compare track right +2 | mA | mA reverse with approx. 550 mA
to track left
| mA | mA forward with approx. 950 mA
| mA | mA reverse with approx. 950 mA

If installed:
C. Pedal-tests with tester CET 03/08 (see Service Manual section 10.6/chapter "fine adjustment") - Diesel engine not running
T.No. Test During test After adjustment / repair Remarks
1. Inch/brake pedal adjustments according to adjustments according to observe display - "Inchpedal ext" etc.
guidelines yes no guidelines yes no LED "Voltage" must be always green

Remarks:
Adjustment guidelines - quick reference and explanations
Complete the test procedure according to the checklist, even for a partial check. Use pressure gauges appropriate
for the test ranges. To test the track speed / straight run, raise the machine off the ground and support it properly, so
that the chains can turn freely without danger.
Make sure to observe all safety guidelines - see group 1.2.01!
Use only the correct tools (test instruments). The Diesel engine RPMs must be as noted. Perform all required
maintenance work before adjustment.
In case of questions, make sure to use the detailed instructions: for the adjustment of the travel hydraulic, see
section 6.5.00, for the adjustment of the working hydraulic, see section 7.5.10 ,for the use of the test box CET
08/03, see section 10.4.00. and for the use of the pedal control tester, see section 10.6.00.
When putting the machine into service, proceed according to the guidelines given in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Check all indicators and gauges to ensure they are functioning correctly.
Defects must be repaired immediately or as soon as possible, depending on the type of problem.

A. Tests with standard test instruments


All pressure tests must be performed at 1000 RPM (without engine load) unless noted otherwise.

1. Visual tests and maintenance


Insufficient maintenance and mechanical component defects often point to the cause of the problem. Check oil
levels, filters, coolant level, mechanical components and their mounting, cables and wiring harnesses, etc.
Repair any detected defects immediately or as soon as possible, depending on the type of problem.

2. Operating temperature
If the operating temperature is reached only for a short time, cover the cooler (air flow) partially for the test /
adjustment. With the oil at operating temperature, before performing additional tests, actuate all hydraulic
functions and monitor the temperature constantly. For additional information about bringing the hydraulic system
to operating temperature, see group 6.5 or 7.5.

3. Cold start valve (travel hydraulic)


Needs to be checked only for troubleshooting (example: in case of temperature problems). Valve should be
closed, with the oil at operating temperature (also valid for by-pass valve on PR 742B). Check adjustment, see
group 6.5, p. 3.

4. Servo pressure (working hydraulic)


Not adjustable - is a result of SP pressure. In case of problems, for example Quick drop, see Adjustment -
Working hydraulic, group 7.5.10.

5. Stand-by pressure (working hydraulic)


This pressure is the basis for the proper function of the entire working hydraulic system.
Note: Only the new A10V100 pumps in PR732 and all A10V140 pumps in PR 742B machines, are
equipped with the stand-by valve (which is installed between the regulator and the pump housing).
The adjustment on all A10V-pumps is made on the LS regulator.

6. Pressure limitation (working hydraulic)

6.1. Primary pressure


To check, raise the pressure cut off setting. Check the pressure via the tilt circuit or additional attachments
without secondary relief.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0385 5599
Mjfcifss! PR 722(B) F/N xxx-0564 5599
Quick Reference PR 732 B F/N xxx-2501 5599
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-2501 5599

01 03 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.01.02
Feuille
6.2. Secondary pressure
To check, raise the pressure cut off and primary pressure setting. For the blade down function, block the line
or proceed as outlined in group 7.5.

Note the secondary pressure relief setting for additional attachments separately on the checklist.

6.3. Pressure cut off


The pressure cut off limits the maximum working pressure. Primary and secondary pressure relief valves are
only installed for system safety. Check the pressure as the primary pressure via the tilt circuit or additional
attachment circuit without secondary relief.

6.4. Blank line for pressure setting of additional attachment (enter test point / description)

6.5. Blank line for pressure setting of additional attachment (enter test point / description)

6.6. Blank line for pressure setting of additional attachment (enter test point / description)

7. Pressure difference -p HD to LD (working hydraulic)


The p pressure in the fine control range is obtained on the machines with regulating pump A10V = PR 712(B),
PR 722(B), PR 732B und PR 742B from the setting of the stand-by pressure.
The drop of p with the control valve spools fully opened is necessary to obtain the shortest working cycles.

8. Accumulator (working hydraulic)


For safety reasons, it must be possible to actuate a function (blade down) several times (within 3 minutes) after
the Diesel engine is turned off.

9. Replenishing pressure ( travel hydraulic)


If the pressure is too low, find and remedy the problem before continuing machine operation.

10. Control pressure (travel hydraulic PR 742(B) to F/N xxx-5233)


The existing pressure value depends on the valve adjustment and the replenishing pressure, see schematic,
group 6.

11.Hydraulic neutral position (travel hydraulic - travel pumps)


Leave the safety lever in the down position. Check first with 0-600 bar pressure gauge, for final check /
adjustment, use a 0- 40 / 0-60 bar pressure gauge.
The normal pressure reading should correspond to the replenishing pressure. The permissible pressure
difference between M1 and M2 may be no more than 1.0 bar.

12.Pressure limitation of maximum system pressure (travel hydraulic)


Not adjustable. Check only if needed. Check O-rings on blind flanges. Determine location of test points M1/M2 ,
depending on the type of travel gear.
All work must be performed clean and carefully. Actuate the pumps carefully and hold the maximum pressure
only for a short time. Bleed the system after tests.
B. Tests with test box CET 08 / 03
Before carrying out tests / adjustments, check the operational readiness and function of the LED on the test box
and its adapter- see 10.4.

1. Identification
For identification, the indicators on the adapter and the test box have to be combined.
In case of incorrect identification, check the operating condition of test box first - for example: check the rotary
switch position and the cable configuration, then check the machine wire harness connections.

2. Battery
If the battery is always at undervoltage, check the position of the safety lever and the emergency shut off button
first, then continue to check the power supply.

3. Indicator lights - electronic fault indicator- H12


If there is a problem in the system, the time the indicator light lights up can give an initial hint to the problem area.
Along with the electronic monitoring indicator light, the 'reduced speed range' indicator light H11 lights up as well.
If these lights do not light up during the test, check the bulbs, wiring and relays.

4. Signal - preselection "reduced speed range"

4.1. Reduced travel speed range with push button switch S12 on the panel (0 4,6 km/h)
If the LED does not light up during the test, check the switch and wiring.

4.2. Reduced travel speed range with rocker switch S29 on the travel control joystick
Rocker switch in position I (04 km/h) = diode must be on
Rocker switch in position II (06,5 km/h) = diode must switch off
Rocker switch in position III (011 km/h) = diode must be on
If the test result is not correct, check the switch and the wiring harness.

5. Signal - counter rotation"


If the LED does not light up during the test, or if it turns off during joystick deflection, check the wiring as well as
the switch and cable in the joystick.

6. Travel joystick
The pointers in the test box must follow the joystick deflection evenly. Erratic movement or lack of movement
indicates an error and should be noted as such on the checklist.
In the four main directions, at full joystick deflection, the corresponding green LED must light up. In diagonal
deflection, most of the time both directional LEDs light up, a jump", however, is within the permitted tolerance
range.
The red error" diode may not light up in any joystick position.
Notes: Do not actuate the push button switch counter rotation while testing the travel joystick - this can
cause wrong Error - indications.

7. Proportional solenoids
Push the push button for about 15 seconds. If an error is shown, swap the connectors at the proportional
solenoids and check again to find the problem - cable or solenoid.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0385 5599
Mjfcifss! PR 722(B) F/N xxx-0564 5599
Quick Reference PR 732 B F/N xxx-2501 5599
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-2501 5599

01 03 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.01.03
Feuille
8. Alternator
In case of constant low voltage, always check the position of the safety lever and the emergency shut off button,
then continue to check the power supply.
Push the push button for about 15 seconds. If the green LED turns off and the red one lights up, check the
alternator or V-belt.

9. RPM sensor - Diesel engine


Readings at the test box adapter are valid.
In case of error indication, remove the sensor and check it visually and/or clean. Check the harness and required
distance to the top of the flywheel tooth. Repeat the test.

10.Diesel engine RPM


Readings at the test box are valid.
If values are too low, check function and routing of shut off cable, even check the neutral functions of the
hydraulic system. Make adjustments on the stop screws of the engine operation in the cab and when necessary
check adjustment of the injection pump - see chapter 17.4.
If engine RPM is changed via a lever, the springs may not be fully compressed in any position.

11.Potentiometer
The pointer in the test box must follow the throttle position evenly. Jerky movement or lack of movement
indicates a defect and should be noted as such on the checklist.
Approach test values of potentiometer adjustment from the medium RPM range of the Diesel engine. Determine
the difference between the high and low idle (step 10) to those engine speeds and record the RPM where the
corresponding LED just lights up (not flicker). If necessary, repeat the test several times. The nominal value
should be within 30+20 RPM each.

12. Release the brake


When the LED lights up on the test box, the indicator light on the panel must turn off.
LED does not light up electrical defect
Indicator light does not turn off hydraulic / mechanical defect
Caution: If step A-11 was not carried out at all or carried out incorrectly, the chains may already begin to turn.

13. RPM sensor - hydraulic motors


Test read out usually starts in speed range 3, however, perform the test always in stage 5 (higher signal
number). Before changing from left right", stop the track run, switch over and run again.
No indication Problem due to electrical circuit interruption, possible total sensor failure
Mark appropriate square on check list
Red diode Sensor sends error signal

14.Basic adjustment - left track


The speed of the left track is shown in relation to the stored values in the test box. Carry out the required
adjustment corrections until the analog indicator is in the green - center" range, even after several checks.
Note: - The pump control / adjustment depends on the type of travel gear installed.
- If surging" occurs in a speed range, set the corresponding regulating range (= adjustment stage 4,
or stage 2 and 4, or stage 2) to the end of the left (slower) green range.
- If an existing adjustment is changed, change the adjustment to the required direction until indication
is in the red range during the next test run. Then return the adjustment to the required green range.
- Always make adjustment changes after the chain stops turning.
15.Straight run, right chain compared to the left chain
The speed of the right chain is shown in relation to the speed of the left chain, measured via the speed sensors
of the travel motors.
If no basic adjustment of the left track was made as noted in par. 14, only minor corrections may be made. But in
all speed ranges the faster chain has to be matched to the slower chain.
If the basic adjustment of the left track was made as noted in par. 14, the right track is matched to the left track.
A normal test run can be carried out in the switch position Test". For adjustments, every test run must be made
in the switch position Adjust". Correct adjustments until the analog indicator is in the green - center" range,
even after several test runs.
Note: - If an existing adjustment is changed, change the adjustment to the required direction until the
indication is in the red range during the test run. Then return the adjustment to the required green
range.
- Always make adjustment changes after the chain stops turning.

16. Current supply (Special test during normal travel - test box with Y-cable)
This test is only required when troubleshooting. Only the current supply on the right track is measured.
Additional indications are due to the switch design and have no meaning.
When selecting the travel speed range via push button switch S12 on the panel = use values of column "2-
ranges", when selecting the travel speed range via rocker switch S29 on the travel control joystick = use values
of column "3-ranges".
Notes - If the maximum values are not reached, check the position of the throttle control lever.
- For the simulation of the required engine load, see paragraph 10.4.

17.Straight run, right chain to left chain (Special test during normal travel - test box with Y-cable)
Perform this test only if the machine cannot be raised off the ground and properly supported.
During normal travel operation, the current supply to the right drive side and the speed of the right track in
relation to the speed of the left track is shown. Due to external influences, despite a wide tolerance range, large
deviations (fluctuating) exist.
Additional indications are due to the switch design and have no meaning.

C. Pedal-tests with tester CET 03/08


1. Inch/brake pedal
If there is an Inch / brake pedal installed, always perform the check of the adjustments when the electronic box is
connected = connect all cables of the tester.
Guidelines for the test and further notes see chapter 10.6, section B -1.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712(B) F/N xxx-0385 5599
Mjfcifss! PR 722(B) F/N xxx-0564 5599
Quick Reference PR 732 B F/N xxx-2501 5599
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-2501 5599

01 03 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.01.04
Feuille
Customer - Name and address: Machine type: PIN: - Sm-hrs.: Date:
Job application/ location:
Checked by:
from company:

A Tests with standard test instruments - test with Diesel engine RPM at 1000 RPM or as outlined
Test Test Test points Nominal Test value Remarks
No. value actual value adjusted value
1. Visual test and maintenance o.k. remarks o.k. remarks fluids, filters, mech. components, etc..
Hydraulic system
2. Cold start valve - theoretic checked: changed: - at PR 712 to PR 732 - only if necessary
25 bar
1
replenishing circuit SD yes no yes no - for test / adjustment see guidelines
+10
3. Pressure limitation 110 bar bar -- PR 712
+10
fan drive 130 bar bar -- PR 722 Diesel engine at nmax,
LA +10
150 bar bar -- PR 732 at least one sensor unplugged.
+10
210 bar bar -- PR 742
4. Operating
must remain constant during all tests
70 C
10
temperature hydraulic tank C C
18+ bar
7
5. Servo pressure ND bar -- working hydraulic
+1
6. Stand by pressure working hydr 20 bar bar bar PR 712, PR 722 (A10V-without stand-by valve)
25+ bar
HD 1
bar bar PR 732, PR 742 (A10V-with stand-by valve)
7. Pressure limitation
220 bar
7.1 Prim. pressure 5
working hydr. bar bar
210 bar
5
7.2 Sec. pressure HD bar bar lift cylinder circuit
5
7.3 Pressure cut off 160 bar bar bar max. working pressure
7.4 bar bar bar pressure settings for optional
7.5 bar bar bar hydraulic functions
14+ bar
6
8. Pressure working hydr bar bar in fine control range (check only if necessary)
difference = p HD to LD <13 bar bar bar when spool is fully shifted
9. Accumulator test min. 4x possible actuation after engine is turned off
+4
10. Replenishing SP 16 bar bar PR 712 to PR 732
pressure travel hydr. 3
25 bar bar PR 742
11. Hydr. neutral pos. Shaft right M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
travel hydraulic M1 + M2 1 bar M2 bar bar pump right
Shaft left M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
M1 + M2 1 bar M2 bar bar pump left
+30/-10
12. Max. pressure M1 right 420 ri bar bar check only if necessary
travel forward M1 left bar le bar bar use test flanges!
+30/-10
Max. pressure M2 right 420 ri bar bar
travel reverse M2 left bar le bar bar

B. Test with test box CET 08/03 H (see SM - section 10.4) and adapter CET 14/03 or CET 14/05
- mark LED which lights up or note position of analog indicator (space No. = at test box, A = at adapter)
- test with Diesel engine RPM at max. RPM or as noted - with e-box CEP12/08C, CEP12/20 first observe section D
LED - color: = green = yellow = red indicators =
Test Test Space During test After adjustment / repair. Remarks
No. No.
Diesel engine is not running
1. Identification A/6 Inl.6 V6/Inl.4 752/X..... Inl.6 V6/Inl.4 752/X..... record denomination of LED
2. Battery 8 o.k. undervolt. o.k. undervolt. after approx. 10 sec. of actuation
3. Indicator light 9 light at panel on: yes light at panel on: yes light at panel = on instrument panel of machine
electron. fault ind. no no ("reduced speed" light lights together)
4. Signal 9 no signal no signal 2-ranges -normal range 3-ranges - normal = III
travel speed -
range selection no signal no signal - select "red. speed range" - red. speed range II
no signal no signal -- - red. speed range I
5. Signal counter rot. 9 signal error signal error press button and deflect joystick in all directions
6. Travel joystick 4 good good = analogic display of sections
defect defect
7. Proportional 11 after approx. 10 sec. of actuation
solenoids

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
PR 732 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-5600 6199

01 03 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.02.01
Feuille
Test. Test Space During test After adjustment / repair Remarks
No. No.
Diesel engine running
8. Alternator 8 overv. o.k. underv. overv. o.k. underv. Diesel engine approx. 1500 RPM / test for 10 sec.
9. RPM sensor A low o.k. high low o.k. high must be green from nmin up to nmax
Diesel engine
+50
10. RPM 2 min: max: min: max: min: 800 RPM
+80
Diesel engine max: PR 712 / 722 2100 RPM
...............- RPM -................. ...............- RPM -................. +80
PR 732 / 742 1900 RPM
11. Potentiometer 3 {max.-.....RPM good {max.-.....RPM good
+20
should be green at nmax -30 RPM and
nominal RPM {min.+.....RPM defect {min.+.....RPM defect
+20
nmin +30 RPM / = indication at part. range
12. Brake release 14 light at on light at on
must be functioning for all remaining tests
panel: off panel: off
Tracks running machine must be raised off the ground
13. RPM sensor 13 right right = no indication /
oil motors left left must be "ok" for further tests
14. Basic adjustment 14 forward 2 forward 2 pump regulating range forward
left track
forward 3 forward 3 pump end of regulating forward
- only if required - reverse 2 reverse 2 pump regulating range reverse
reverse 3 reverse 3 pump end of regulating reverse
forward 4 forward 4 motor regulating range forward
forward 5 forward 5 control tests -
reverse 4 reverse 4 values are resulting from
reverse 5 reverse 5 previous adjustments
15. Straight run 14 Test Adjust Adjust note position of rotary switch
compare track right
forward 1 yes no forward 1 yes no travel begin forward - tracks start to turn
to track left
forward 2 forward 2 pump regulating range forward
forward 3 forward 3 pump end of regulating forward
reverse 1 yes no reverse 1 yes no travel begin reverse - tracks start to turn
reverse 2 reverse 2 pump regulating range reverse
reverse 3 reverse 3 pump end of regulating reverse
forward 4 forward 4 motor regulating range forward
forward 5 forward 5 control tests -
reverse 4 reverse 4 values are resulting from
reverse 5 reverse 5 previous adjustments
Special tests - travel operation throttle lever must be at max. RPM position
16. Current supply 20
2 (440 ) mA initial current jump
2-ranges 3-ranges
max. mA
16.1 Diesel engine PR 712 - 1450+70 mA, PR 712 - 1450+70mA
not running
in normal speed range PR 722 - 1445+70 mA PR 722 - 1445+70 mA
(switch position III) PR 732 - 1410+70 mA, PR 732 - 1410+70 mA
PR 742 - 1380+70 mA
max. mA PR 712 - 100050 mA PR 712 - 1240+50 mA
in reduced speed range PR 722 - 99050 mA PR 722 - 1235+50 mA
PR 732 - 98050 mA PR 732 - 1230+50 mA
(switch position II)
PR 742 - 1200+50 mA
max. mA -- PR 712 - 910+50 mA
in reduced speed range PR 722 - 900+50 mA
PR 732 - 890+50 mA
(switch position I) PR 742 - 880+50 mA
(1180 )
80
mA reduced value when steering left (normal range)
20
16.2 Diesel engine (440 ) mA initial current jump
running (500+
100
) mA minimum current at maximum load (RPM drop)

If installed:
C. Pedal-tests with tester CET 03/08 (see Service Manual section 10.6/chapter "fine adjustment") - Diesel engine not running
T.No. Test During test After adjustment / repair Remarks
1. adjustments according to adjustments according to observe display - "Inchpedal ext" etc.
Inch/brake pedal
guidelines yes no guidelines yes no LED "Voltage" must be always green

D. Edit error memory with E-Box Evaluation Kit (with e-box CEP12/08C, CEP12/20) - following the software instructions
T.No. Test Before checklist step B/C After checklist step B/C Remarks
1. Read memory memory available: memory deleted: Print out memory following the software
yes no yes no instructions and add the adjustment checklist, or
1.1 Record codes record here in saved order.

Remarks:
Adjustment guidelines - quick reference and explanations
Complete the test procedure according to the checklist, even for a partial check. Use pressure gauges appropriate
for the test ranges. To test the track speed / straight run, raise the machine off the ground and support it properly, so
that the chains can turn freely without danger.
Make sure to observe all safety guidelines - see group 1.2.01!
Use only the correct tools (test instruments). The Diesel engine RPMs must be as noted. Perform all required
maintenance work before adjustment.
In case of questions, make sure to use the detailed instructions: for the adjustment of the travel hydraulic, see
section 6.5.00, for the adjustment of the working hydraulic, see section 7.5.10 ,for the use of the test box CET
08/03, see section 10.4.00. and for the use of the pedal control tester, see section 10.6.00.
When putting the machine into service, proceed according to the guidelines given in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Check all indicators and gauges to ensure they are functioning correctly.
Defects must be repaired immediately or as soon as possible, depending on the type of problem.

A. Tests with standard test instruments


All pressure tests must be performed at 1000 RPM (without engine load) unless noted otherwise.

1. Visual tests and maintenance


Insufficient maintenance and mechanical component defects often point to the cause of the problem. Check oil
levels, filters, coolant level, mechanical components and their mounting, cables and wiring harnesses, etc.
Repair any detected defects immediately or as soon as possible, depending on the type of problem.

2. Cold start valve (travel hydraulic)


Needs to be checked only for troubleshooting (example: in case of temperature problems). Valve should be
closed, with the oil at operating temperature (also valid for by-pass valve on PR 742B). Check adjustment, see
group 6.5, p. 3.

3. Pressure limitation (fan drive)


When the sensor is unplugged and the Diesel engine is on high idle, the postulated maximum pressure has to be
reached.
The proportional - pressure relief valve is not adjustable and is regulated by the electronic.
When overheating in spite of right pressure and clean radiator, in every case check the fan RPM. This RPM
doesn't depends only on pressure (also on air supply, turning resistance, damages, and suchlike). for RPM see
technical data 3.1, Instructions see chapter 6.5.

4. Operating temperature
If the operating temperature is reached only for a short time, cover the cooler (air flow) partially for the test /
adjustment. With the oil at operating temperature, before performing additional tests, actuate all hydraulic
functions and monitor the temperature constantly. For additional information about bringing the hydraulic system
to operating temperature, see group 6.5 or 7.5.

5. Servo pressure (working hydraulic)


Not adjustable - is a result of SP pressure. In case of problems, for example Quick drop, see Adjustment -
Working hydraulic, group 7.5.10.

6. Stand-by pressure (working hydraulic)


This pressure is the basis for the proper function of the entire working hydraulic system.
Note: Only the A10V100 pumps in PR732 and the A10V140 pumps in PR 742B machines, are equipped
with the stand-by valve (which is installed between the regulator and the pump housing). The
adjustment on all A10V-pumps is made on the LS regulator.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Quick Reference PR 732 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-5600 6199

01 03 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.02.02
Feuille
7. Pressure limitation (working hydraulic)

7.1. Primary pressure


To check, raise the pressure cut off setting. Check the pressure via the tilt circuit or additional attachments
without secondary relief.

7.2. Secondary pressure


To check, raise the pressure cut off and primary pressure setting. For the blade down function, block the line
or proceed as outlined in group 7.5.

Note the secondary pressure relief setting for additional attachments separately on the checklist.

7.3. Pressure cut off


The pressure cut off limits the maximum working pressure. Primary and secondary pressure relief valves are
only installed for system safety. Check the pressure as the primary pressure via the tilt circuit or additional
attachment circuit without secondary relief.

7.4. Blank line for pressure setting of additional attachment (enter test point / description)

7.5. Blank line for pressure setting of additional attachment (enter test point / description)

8. Pressure difference -p HD to LD (working hydraulic)


The p pressure in the fine control range is obtained on the machines with regulating pump A10V = PR 712 B,
PR 722 B, PR 732 B und PR 742 B from the setting of the stand-by pressure.
The drop of p with the control valve spools fully opened is necessary to obtain the shortest working cycles.

9. Accumulator (working hydraulic)


For safety reasons, it must be possible to actuate a function (blade down) several times (within 3 minutes) after
the Diesel engine is turned off.

10. Replenishing pressure ( travel hydraulic)


If the pressure is too low, find and remedy the problem before continuing machine operation.

11.Hydraulic neutral position (travel hydraulic - travel pumps)


Leave the safety lever in the down position. Check first with 0-600 bar pressure gauge, for final check /
adjustment, use a 0- 40 / 0-60 bar pressure gauge.
The normal pressure reading should correspond to the replenishing pressure. The permissible pressure
difference between M1 and M2 may be no more than 1.0 bar.

12.Pressure limitation of maximum system pressure (travel hydraulic)


Not adjustable. Check only if needed. Check O-rings on blind flanges. Determine location of test points M1/M2 ,
depending on the type of travel gear.
All work must be performed clean and carefully. Actuate the pumps carefully and hold the maximum pressure
only for a short time. Bleed the system after tests.

Caution: Before carrying out tests/adjustments following section B, check the version of the electronic
box. If there is a CEP 12/08C, CEP 12/20 or higher electronic box installed, observe section D =
evaluate memory.
B. Tests with test box CET 08 / 03
Before carrying out tests / adjustments, check the operational readiness and function of the LED on the test box
and its adapter- see 10.4.

1. Identification
For identification, the indicators on the adapter and the test box have to be combined.
In case of incorrect identification, check the operating condition of test box first - for example: check the rotary
switch position and the cable configuration, then check the machine wire harness connections.

2. Battery
If the battery is always at undervoltage, check the position of the safety lever and the emergency shut off button
first, then continue to check the power supply.

3. Indicator lights - electronic fault indicator- H12


If there is a problem in the system, the time the indicator light lights up can give an initial hint to the problem area.
Along with the electronic monitoring indicator light, the 'reduced speed range' indicator light H11 lights up as well.
If these lights do not light up during the test, check the bulbs, wiring and relays.

4. Signal - preselection "reduced speed range"

4.1. Reduced travel speed range with push button switch S12 on the panel (0 4,6 km/h)
If the LED does not light up during the test, check the switch and wiring.

4.2. Reduced travel speed range with rocker switch S29 on the travel control joystick
Rocker switch in position I (04 km/h) = diode must be on
Rocker switch in position II (06,5 km/h) = diode must switch off
Rocker switch in position III (011 km/h) = diode must be on
If the test result is not correct, check the switch and the wiring harness.

5. Signal - counter rotation"


If the LED does not light up during the test, or if it turns off during joystick deflection, check the wiring as well as
the switch and cable in the joystick.

6. Travel joystick
The pointers in the test box must follow the joystick deflection evenly. Erratic movement or lack of movement
indicates an error and should be noted as such on the checklist.
In the four main directions, at full joystick deflection, the corresponding green LED must light up. In diagonal
deflection, most of the time both directional LEDs light up, a jump", however, is within the permitted tolerance
range.
The red error" diode may not light up in any joystick position.
Notes: Do not actuate the push button switch counter rotation while testing the travel joystick - this can
cause wrong Error - indications.

7. Proportional solenoids
Push the push button for about 15 seconds. If an error is shown, swap the connectors at the proportional
solenoids and check again to find the problem - cable or solenoid.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Quick Reference PR 732 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-5600 6199

01 03 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.02.03
Feuille
8. Alternator
In case of constant low voltage, always check the position of the safety lever and the emergency shut off button,
then continue to check the power supply.
Push the push button for about 15 seconds. If the green LED turns off and the red one lights up, check the
alternator or V-belt.

9. RPM sensor - Diesel engine


Readings at the test box adapter are valid.
In case of error indication, remove the sensor and check it visually and/or clean. Check the harness and required
distance to the top of the flywheel tooth. Repeat the test.

10.Diesel engine RPM


Readings at the test box are valid.
If values are too low, check the neutral functions of the hydraulic system. Make adjustments on the stop screws
of the engine operation in the cab and when necessary check adjustment of the injection pump - see chapter
17.4.
If engine RPM is changed via a lever, the springs may not be fully compressed in any position.

11.Potentiometer
The pointer in the test box must follow the throttle position evenly. Jerky movement or lack of movement
indicates a defect and should be noted as such on the checklist.
Approach test values of potentiometer adjustment from the medium RPM range of the Diesel engine. Determine
the difference between the high and low idle (step 10) to those engine speeds and record the RPM where the
corresponding LED just lights up (not flicker). If necessary, repeat the test several times. The nominal value
should be within 30+20 RPM each.

12. Release the brake


When the LED lights up on the test box, the indicator light on the panel must turn off.
LED does not light up electrical defect
Indicator light does not turn off hydraulic / mechanical defect
Caution: If step A-11 was not carried out at all or carried out incorrectly, the chains may already begin to turn.

13. RPM sensor - hydraulic motors


Test read out usually starts in speed range 3, however, perform the test as possible in stage 5 (higher signal
number). Before changing from left right", stop the track run, switch over and run again.
No indication Problem due to electrical circuit interruption (wiring), possible total sensor failure
Mark appropriate square on adjustment check list
Red diode Sensor sends error signal

14.Basic adjustment - left track


The speed of the left track is shown in relation to the stored values in the test box. Carry out the required
adjustment corrections until the analog indicator is in the green - center" range, even after several checks.
Note: - If an existing adjustment is changed, change the adjustment to the required direction until indication is in
the red range during the next test run. Then return the adjustment to the required green range
- Always make adjustment changes after the chain stops turning
15.Straight run, right chain compared to the left chain
The speed of the right chain is shown in relation to the speed of the left chain, measured via the speed sensors
of the travel motors.
If no basic adjustment of the left track was made as noted in par. 14, only minor corrections may be made. But in
all speed ranges the faster chain has to be matched to the slower chain.
If the basic adjustment of the left track was made as noted in par. 14, the right track is matched to the left track.
A normal test run can be carried out in the switch position Test". For adjustments, every test run must be made
in the switch position Adjust". Correct adjustments until the analog indicator is in the green - center" range,
even after several test runs.
Note: - If an existing adjustment is changed, change the adjustment to the required direction until the
indication is in the red range during the test run. Then return the adjustment to the required green
range.
- Always make adjustment changes after the chain stops turning.

16. Current supply (Special test during normal travel - test box with Y-cable)
This test is only required when troubleshooting. Only the current supply on the right track is measured.
Additional indications are due to the switch design and have no meaning.
When selecting the travel speed range via push button switch S12 on the panel = use values of column "2-
ranges", when selecting the travel speed range via rocker switch S29 on the travel control joystick = use values
of column "3-ranges".
Notes - If the maximum values are not reached, check the position of the throttle control lever.
- For the simulation of the required engine load, see paragraph 10.4.

17.Straight run, right chain to left chain (Special test during normal travel - test box with Y-cable)
Notes: This test can still be carried out. Caused by the rarely use, this test isn't on the checklist any more.
Record the result under section "Remarks".
Perform this test only if the machine cannot be raised off the ground and properly supported.
During normal travel operation, the current supply to the right drive side and the speed of the right track in
relation to the speed of the left track is shown. Due to external influences, despite a wide tolerance range, large
deviations (fluctuating) exist.
Additional indications are due to the switch design and have no meaning.

C. Pedal-tests with tester CET 03/08


1. Inch/brake pedal
If there is an Inch / brake pedal installed, always perform the check of the adjustments when the electronic box is
connected = connect all cables of the tester.
Guidelines for the test and further notes see chapter 10.6, section B -1.

D. Edit error memory with E-Box Evaluation Kit


Can only be used for electronic box version CEP12/08C, CEP12/20 and higher.

1. Read error memory


Before carrying out tests / adjustments following section B, evaluate the memory, save it on the notebook, print it
out or record the codes in the saved order in the adjustment checklist. Repair existing defects.
After adjustments, check the memory once again, delete the error memory!
Notes: If the program displays "Error" from the beginning, check if the right interface COM1,2,3 or 4 is
chosen, check plugs/wiring, check the power supply 24V from the instrument panel.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Quick Reference PR 732 B F/N xxx-5600 6199
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-5600 6199

01 03 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.02.04
Feuille
Customer - Name and address: Machine type: PIN: - Sm-hrs.: Date:
Job application/ location:
Checked by:
from company:

A Tests with standard test instruments - test with Diesel engine RPM at 1000 RPM or as outlined
Test Test Test points Nominal Test value Remarks
No. value actual value adjusted value
1. Visual test and maintenance o.k. remarks o.k. remarks fluids, filters, mech. components, etc..
Hydraulic system
2. Cold start valve - theoretic checked: changed: - at PR 712 to PR 732 - only if necessary
25 bar
1
replenishing circuit SD yes no yes no - for test / adjustment see guidelines
+10
3. Pressure limitation 110 bar bar -- PR 712
+10
fan drive 130 bar bar -- PR 722 Diesel engine at nmax,
LA +10
150 bar bar -- PR 732 at least one sensor unplugged.
+10
210 bar bar -- PR 742
4. Operating
must remain constant during all tests
70 C
10
temperature hydraulic tank C C
18+ bar
7
5. Servo pressure ND bar -- working hydraulic
+1
6. Stand by pressure working hydr 20 bar bar bar PR 712, PR 722 (A10V-without stand-by valve)
25+ bar
HD 1
bar bar PR 732, PR 742 (A10V-with stand-by valve)
7. Pressure limitation
220 bar
7.1 Prim. pressure 5
working hydr. bar bar
210 bar
5
7.2 Sec. pressure HD bar bar lift cylinder circuit
5
7.3 Pressure cut off 160 bar bar bar max. working pressure
7.4 bar bar bar pressure settings for optional
7.5 bar bar bar hydraulic functions
14+ bar
6
8. Pressure working hydr bar bar in fine control range (check only if necessary)
difference = p HD to LD <13 bar bar bar when spool is fully shifted
9. Accumulator test min. 4x possible actuation after engine is turned off
+4
10. Replenishing SP 16 bar bar PR 712 to PR 732
pressure travel hydr. 3
25 bar bar PR 742
11. Hydr. neutral pos. Shaft right M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
travel hydraulic M1 + M2 1 bar M2 bar bar pump right
Shaft left M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
M1 + M2 1 bar M2 bar bar pump left
+30/-10
12. Max. pressure M1 right 420 ri bar bar check only if necessary
travel forward M1 left bar le bar bar use test flanges!
+30/-10
Max. pressure M2 right 420 ri bar bar
travel reverse M2 left bar le bar bar

B. Edit error memory with E-Box Evaluation Kit - following the software instructions
T.No. Test Before checklist step C/D After checklist step C/D Remarks
1. Read memory memory available: memory deleted: Print out memory following the software
yes no yes no instructions and add the adjustment checklist, or
1.1 Record codes record here in saved order.

C. Pedal-tests with tester CET 03/08 (see Service Manual section 10.6/chapter "fine adjustment") - Diesel engine not running
Pedal installed yes no
T.No. Test During test After adjustment / repair Remarks
1. adjustments according to adjustments according to observe display - "Inchpedal ext" etc.
Inch/brake pedal
guidelines yes no guidelines yes no LED "Voltage" must be always green

Remarks to A - B - C:

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx-6200
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx-6200
PR 732 B F/N xxx-6200
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-6200

01 03 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.03.01
Feuille
D. Test with test box CET 08/03 H (see SM - section 10.4) and adapter CET 14/03 or CET 14/05
- mark LED which lights up or note position of analog indicator (space No. = at test box, A = at adapter)
- test with Diesel engine RPM at max. RPM or as noted - after all adjustments are done check and delete E-Box memory - see step B.
LED - color: = green = yellow = red indicators =
Test Test Space During test After adjustment / repair. Remarks
No. No.
Diesel engine is not running
1. Identification A/6 Inl.6 V6/Inl.4 752/X..... Inl.6 V6/Inl.4 752/X..... record denomination of LED
2. Battery 8 o.k. undervolt. o.k. undervolt. after approx. 10 sec. of actuation
3. Indicator light 9 light at panel on: yes light at panel on: yes light at panel = on instrument panel of machine
electron. fault ind. no no ("reduced speed" light lights together)
4. Signal 9 no signal no signal 3-ranges - normal = III
travel speed -
range selection no signal no signal - red. speed range II
no signal no signal - red. speed range I
5. Signal counterrot." 9 signal error signal error press button and deflect joystick in all directions
6. Travel joystick 4 good good = analogic display of sections
defect defect
7. Proportional 11 after approx. 10 sec. of actuation
solenoids

Diesel engine running


8. Alternator 8 overv. o.k. underv. overv. o.k. underv. Diesel engine approx. 1500 RPM / test for 10 sec.
9. RPM sensor A low o.k. high low o.k. high must be green from nmin up to nmax
Diesel engine
+50
10. RPM 2 min: max: min: max: min: 800 RPM
+80
Diesel engine max: PR 712 / 722 2100 RPM
...............- RPM -................. ...............- RPM -................. +80
PR 732 / 742 1900 RPM
11. Potentiometer 3 {max.-.....RPM good {max.-.....RPM good
+20
should be green at nmax -30 RPM and
nominal RPM {min.+.....RPM defect {min.+.....RPM defect
+20
nmin +30 RPM / = indication at part. range
12. Brake release 14 light at on light at on
must be functioning for all remaining tests
panel: off panel: off
Tracks running machine must be raised off the ground
13. RPM sensor 13 right right = no indication /
oil motors left left must be "ok" for further tests
14. Basic adjustment 14 forward 2 forward 2 pump regulating range forward
left track
forward 3 forward 3 pump end of regulating forward
- only if required - reverse 2 reverse 2 pump regulating range reverse
reverse 3 reverse 3 pump end of regulating reverse
forward 4 forward 4 motor regulating range forward
forward 5 forward 5 control tests -
reverse 4 reverse 4 values are resulting from
reverse 5 reverse 5 previous adjustments
15. Straight run 14 Test Adjust Adjust note position of rotary switch
compare track right
forward 1 yes no forward 1 yes no travel begin forward - tracks start to turn
to track left
forward 2 forward 2 pump regulating range forward
forward 3 forward 3 pump end of regulating forward
reverse 1 yes no reverse 1 yes no travel begin reverse - tracks start to turn
reverse 2 reverse 2 pump regulating range reverse
reverse 3 reverse 3 pump end of regulating reverse
forward 4 forward 4 motor regulating range forward
forward 5 forward 5 control tests -
reverse 4 reverse 4 values are resulting from
reverse 5 reverse 5 previous adjustments
Special tests - travel operation throttle lever must be at max. RPM position
16. Current supply (440 )
20
2 mA initial current jump
max. mA PR 712 - 1450+70mA
16.1 Diesel engine PR 722 - 1445+70 mA
not running
in normal speed range PR 732 - 1410+70 mA
(switch position III) PR 742 - 1380+70 mA
max. f. /r. mA PR 712 - 1240+50 mA
in reduced speed range
forward: PR 722 - 1235+50 mA
reverse: PR 732 - 1230+50 mA
(switch position II)
PR 742 - 1160+50 mA forward / 1230+50 mA reverse
max. f. /r. mA PR 712 - 910+50 mA
in reduced speed range
forward: PR 722 - 900+50 mA
reverse: PR 732 - 890+50 mA
(switch position I) PR 742 - 890+50 mA forward / 1000+50 mA reverse
(1180 )
80
mA reduced value when steering left (normal range)
(440 )
20
16.2 Diesel engine mA initial current jump
running

Remarks:
Adjustment guidelines - quick reference and explanations
Complete the test procedure according to the checklist, even for a partial check. Use pressure gauges appropriate
for the test ranges. To test the track speed / straight run, raise the machine off the ground and support it properly, so
that the chains can turn freely without danger.
Make sure to observe all safety guidelines - see group 1.2.01!
Use only the correct tools (test instruments). The Diesel engine RPMs must be as noted. Perform all required
maintenance work before adjustment.
In case of questions, make sure to use the detailed instructions: for the adjustment of the travel hydraulic, see
section 6.5.00, for the adjustment of the working hydraulic, see section 7.5.10 ,for the use of the test box CET
08/03, see section 10.4.00. and for the use of the pedal control tester, see section 10.6.00.
When putting the machine into service, proceed according to the guidelines given in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Check all indicators and gauges to ensure they are functioning correctly.
Defects must be repaired immediately or as soon as possible, depending on the type of problem.

A. Tests with standard test instruments


All pressure tests must be performed at 1000 RPM (without engine load) unless noted otherwise.

1. Visual tests and maintenance


Insufficient maintenance and mechanical component defects often point to the cause of the problem. Check oil
levels, filters, coolant level, mechanical components and their mounting, cables and wiring harnesses, etc.
Repair any detected defects immediately or as soon as possible, depending on the type of problem.

2. Cold start valve (travel hydraulic)


Needs to be checked only for troubleshooting (example: in case of temperature problems). Valve should be
closed, with the oil at operating temperature (also valid for by-pass valve on PR 742B). Check adjustment, see
group 6.5, p. 3.

3. Pressure limitation (fan drive)


When the sensor is unplugged and the Diesel engine is on high idle, the postulated maximum pressure has to be
reached.
The proportional - pressure relief valve is not adjustable and is regulated by the electronic.
When overheating in spite of right pressure and clean radiator, in every case check the fan RPM. This RPM
doesn't depends only on pressure (also on air supply, turning resistance, damages, and suchlike). for RPM see
technical data 3.1, Instructions see chapter 6.5.

4. Operating temperature
If the operating temperature is reached only for a short time, cover the cooler (air flow) partially for the test /
adjustment. With the oil at operating temperature, before performing additional tests, actuate all hydraulic
functions and monitor the temperature constantly. For additional information about bringing the hydraulic system
to operating temperature, see group 6.5 or 7.5.

5. Servo pressure (working hydraulic)


Not adjustable - is a result of SP pressure. In case of problems, for example Quick drop, see Adjustment -
Working hydraulic, group 7.5.10.

6. Stand-by pressure (working hydraulic)


This pressure is the basis for the proper function of the entire working hydraulic system.
Note: Only the A10V100 pumps in PR732 and the A10V140 pumps in PR 742B machines, are equipped
with the stand-by valve (which is installed between the regulator and the pump housing). The
adjustment on all A10V-pumps is made on the LS regulator.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx-6200
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx-6200
Quick Reference PR 732 B F/N xxx-6200
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-6200

01 03 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.03.02
Feuille
7. Pressure limitation (working hydraulic)

7.1. Primary pressure


To check, raise the pressure cut off setting. Check the pressure via the tilt circuit or additional attachments
without secondary relief.

7.2. Secondary pressure


To check, raise the pressure cut off and primary pressure setting. For the blade down function, block the line
or proceed as outlined in group 7.5.

Note the secondary pressure relief setting for additional attachments separately on the checklist.

7.3. Pressure cut off


The pressure cut off limits the maximum working pressure. Primary and secondary pressure relief valves are
only installed for system safety. Check the pressure as the primary pressure via the tilt circuit or additional
attachment circuit without secondary relief.

7.4. Blank line for pressure setting of additional attachment (enter test point / description)

7.5. Blank line for pressure setting of additional attachment (enter test point / description)

8. Pressure difference -p HD to LD (working hydraulic)


The p pressure in the fine control range is obtained on the machines with regulating pump A10V = PR 712 B,
PR 722 B, PR 732 B und PR 742 B from the setting of the stand-by pressure.
The drop of p with the control valve spools fully opened is necessary to obtain the shortest working cycles.

9. Accumulator (working hydraulic)


For safety reasons, it must be possible to actuate a function (blade down) several times (within 3 minutes) after
the Diesel engine is turned off.

10. Replenishing pressure (travel hydraulic)


If the pressure is too low, find and remedy the problem before continuing machine operation.

11.Hydraulic neutral position (travel hydraulic - travel pumps)


Leave the safety lever in the down position. Check first with 0-600 bar pressure gauge, for final check /
adjustment, use a 0- 40 / 0-60 bar pressure gauge.
The normal pressure reading should correspond to the replenishing pressure. The permissible pressure
difference between M1 and M2 may be no more than 1.0 bar.

12.Pressure limitation of maximum system pressure (travel hydraulic)


Not adjustable. Check only if needed. Check O-rings on blind flanges. Determine location of test points M1/M2,
depending on the type of travel gear.
All work must be performed clean and carefully. Actuate the pumps carefully and hold the maximum pressure
only for a short time. Bleed the system after tests.

B. Edit error memory with E-Box Evaluation Kit


1. Read error memory
Before carrying out tests / adjustments following section C/D, evaluate the memory, save it on the notebook, print
it out or record the codes in the saved order in the adjustment checklist. Repair existing defects.
After adjustments according to checklist step C and D, check the memory once again, delete the error
memory!
Notes: If the program displays "Error" from the beginning, check if the right interface COM1,2,3 or 4 is
chosen, check plugs/wiring, check the power supply 24V from the instrument panel.
C. Pedal-tests with tester CET 03/08
1. Inch/brake pedal
If there is an Inch / brake pedal installed, always perform the check of the adjustments when the electronic box is
connected = connect all cables of the tester.
Guidelines for the test and further notes see chapter 10.6, section B -1.

D. Tests with test box CET 08/03


Before carrying out tests / adjustments, check the operational readiness and function of the LED on the test box
and its adapter- see 10.4.

1. Identification
For identification, the indicators on the adapter and the test box have to be combined.
In case of incorrect identification, check the operating condition of test box first - for example: check the rotary
switch position and the cable configuration, then check the machine wire harness connections.

2. Battery
If the battery is always at undervoltage, check the position of the safety lever and the emergency shut off button
first, then continue to check the power supply.

3. Indicator lights - electronic fault indicator- H12


If there is a problem in the system, the time the indicator light lights up can give an initial hint to the problem area.
Along with the electronic monitoring indicator light, the 'reduced speed range' indicator light H11 lights up as well.
If these lights do not light up during the test, check the bulbs, wiring and relays.

4. Signal - preselection "reduced speed range" with rocker switch S29 on the travel control joystick
Rocker switch in position I (04 km/h) = diode must be on
Rocker switch in position II (06,5 km/h) = diode must switch off
Rocker switch in position III (011 km/h) = diode must be on
If the test result is not correct, check the switch and the wiring harness.

5. Signal - counter rotation"


If the LED does not light up during the test, or if it turns off during joystick deflection, check the wiring as well as
the switch and cable in the joystick.

6. Travel joystick
The pointers in the test box must follow the joystick deflection evenly. Erratic movement or lack of movement
indicates an error and should be noted as such on the checklist.
In the four main directions, at full joystick deflection, the corresponding green LED must light up. In diagonal
deflection, most of the time both directional LEDs light up, a jump", however, is within the permitted tolerance
range.
The red error" diode may not light up in any joystick position.
Notes: Do not actuate the push button switch counter rotation while testing the travel joystick - this can
cause wrong Error - indications.

7. Proportional solenoids
Push the push button for about 15 seconds. If an error is shown, swap the connectors at the proportional
solenoids and check again to find the problem - cable or solenoid.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx-6200
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx-6200
Quick Reference PR 732 B F/N xxx-6200
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-6200

01 03 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.03.03
Feuille
8. Alternator
In case of constant low voltage, always check the position of the safety lever and the emergency shut off button,
then continue to check the power supply.
Push the push button for about 15 seconds. If the green LED turns off and the red one lights up, check the
alternator or V-belt.

9. RPM sensor - Diesel engine


Readings at the test box adapter are valid.
In case of error indication, remove the sensor and check it visually and/or clean. Check the harness and required
distance to the top of the flywheel tooth. Repeat the test.

10.Diesel engine RPM


Readings at the test box are valid.
If values are too low, check also the neutral functions of the hydraulic system. Make adjustments on the stop
screws of the engine operation in the cab and when necessary check adjustment of the injection pump - see
chapter 17.4.
If engine RPM is changed via a lever, the springs may not be fully compressed in any position.

11.Potentiometer
The pointer in the test box must follow the throttle position evenly. Jerky movement or lack of movement
indicates a defect and should be noted as such on the checklist.
Approach test values of potentiometer adjustment from the medium RPM range of the Diesel engine. Determine
the difference between the high and low idle (step 10) to those engine speeds and record the RPM where the
corresponding LED just lights up (not flicker). If necessary, repeat the test several times. The nominal value
should be within 30+20 RPM each.

12. Release the brake


When the LED lights up on the test box, the indicator light on the panel must turn off.
LED does not light up electrical defect
Indicator light does not turn off hydraulic / mechanical defect
Caution: If step A-11 was not carried out at all or carried out incorrectly, the chains may already begin to turn.

13. RPM sensor - hydraulic motors


Test read out usually starts in speed range 3, however, perform the test as possible in stage 5 (higher signal
number). Before changing from left right", stop the track run, switch over and run again.
No indication Problem due to electrical circuit interruption (wiring), possible total sensor failure
Mark appropriate square on adjustment check list
Red diode Sensor sends error signal

14.Basic adjustment - left track


The speed of the left track is shown in relation to the stored values in the test box. Carry out the required
adjustment corrections until the analog indicator is in the green - center" range, even after several checks.
Note: - If an existing adjustment is changed, change the adjustment to the required direction until indication
is in the red range during the next test run. Then return the adjustment to the required green range
- Always make adjustment changes after the chain stops turning
15.Straight run, right chain compared to the left chain
The speed of the right chain is shown in relation to the speed of the left chain, measured via the speed sensors
of the travel motors.
If no basic adjustment of the left track was made as noted in par. 14, only minor corrections may be made. But in
all speed ranges the faster chain has to be matched to the slower chain.
If the basic adjustment of the left track was made as noted in par. 14, the right track is matched to the left track.
A normal test run can be carried out in the switch position Test". For adjustments, every test run must be made
in the switch position Adjust". Correct adjustments until the analog indicator is in the green - center" range,
even after several test runs.
Note: - If an existing adjustment is changed, change the adjustment to the required direction until the
indication is in the red range during the test run. Then return the adjustment to the required green
range.
- Always make adjustment changes after the chain stops turning.

16. Current supply (Special test during normal travel - test box with Y-cable)
This test is only required when troubleshooting. Only the current supply on the right track is measured.
Additional indications are due to the switch design and have no meaning.
Notes: - If the maximum values are not reached, check the position of the throttle control lever.

17.Straight run, right chain to left chain (Special test during normal travel - test box with Y-cable)
Notes: This test can still be carried out. Caused by the rarely use, this test isn't on the checklist any more.
Record the result under section "Remarks".
Perform this test only if the machine cannot be raised off the ground and properly supported.
During normal travel operation, the current supply to the right drive side and the speed of the right track in
relation to the speed of the left track is shown. Due to external influences, despite a wide tolerance range, large
deviations (fluctuating) exist.
Additional indications are due to the switch design and have no meaning.

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de


PR 712 B F/N xxx-6200
Mjfcifss! PR 722 B F/N xxx-6200
Quick Reference PR 732 B F/N xxx-6200
Datum Edition Date
PR 742 B F/N xxx-6200

01 03 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.03.04
Feuille
Customer - Name and address: Machine type: PIN: - Sm-hrs.: Date:

Job application/ location:

Checked by:

from company:

A. Tests with standard test instruments - test with Diesel engine RPM at 1000 RPM or as outlined
Test Test Test points Nominal Test value Remarks
No. value actual value adjusted value
1. Visual tests and maintenance o.k. remarks o.k. remarks fluids, filters, mech. components, etc.
Hydraulic system
30+
3
2. Stand by pressure fan drive. - LA bar bar A10V - check when machine is cold
3. Operating must remain constant during all tests
70 C
10
temperature Hydraulic tank C C
160
3
4. Pressure limitation LA bar bar fan drive - A10V/Diesel engine at max RPM
5. Cold start valve - travel hydr. theoretic checked: changed: - check only if necessary
replenishing circuit SD 28+2 bar yes no yes no - for test / adjustment see guidelines
25+ bar
3
6. Servo pressure ND bar -- working hydraulic
Pressure +6
7. working hydr. 15 bar bar bar in fine control range - adjust at HPR-pump
difference = p HD to LS <13 bar bar bar when spool is fully shifted
30+ bar
5
8. Stand by pressure HD bar bar working hydraulic - adjust at HPR-pump
9. Pressure limitation working hydr.
270 bar
9.1 Prim. pressure 5
HD bar bar
250 bar
5
9.2 Sec. pressure bar bar lift cylinder circuit - piston bottom side = A1
5
250 bar bar bar lift cylinder circuit - piston rod side = B1
200 bar
5
9.3 Pressure cut off bar bar max. working pressure
9.4 bar bar bar pressure settings for optional
9.5 bar bar bar hydraulic functions
10. Accumulator test min. 4x possible actuation after engine is turned off
+7
11. Repl. pressure SP 20 bar bar travel hydraulic
12. Hydr. neutral pos. right M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
travel hydraulic M1 + M2 1 bar M2 bar bar pump right
left M1 = M2 M1 bar bar
M1 + M2 1 bar M2 bar bar pump left
+30/-10
13. Max. pressure M1 rights 420 ri bar bar check only if necessary
travel forward M1 left bar le bar bar use test plates!
+30/-10
Max. pressure M2 right 420 ri bar bar
travel reverse M2 left bar le bar bar

B. Test with test box CET 08/03 H (see SM - section 10.4) and adapter CET 14/05
- mark LED which lights up or note position of analog indicator (space No. = at test box, A = at adapter)
- test with Diesel engine RPM at max. RPM or as noted -
LED - color: = green = yellow = red indicators =
Test. Test Space During test After adjustment / repair. Remarks
No. No.
Diesel engine is not running
1. Identification A/6 Inl.6 V6/Inl.4 752/X..... Inl.6 V6/Inl.4 752/X..... record denomination of LED
2. Battery 8 o.k. undervolt. o.k. undervolt. after approx. 10 sec. of actuation
3. Indicator light 9 light at panel on: yes light at panel on: yes light at panel = on instrument panel of machine
electron. fault ind. no no ("reduced speed" light lights together)
4. Signal 9 no signal no signal 2-ranges -normal range 3-ranges - normal = III
travel speed -
range selection no signal no signal - select "red. speed range" - red. speed range II
no signal no signal -- - red. speed range I
5. Signal counter rot. 9 signal error signal error press button and deflect joystick in all directions
6. Travel joystick 4 good good = analogic display of sections
defect defect
7. Proportional 11 after approx. 10 sec. of actuation
solenoids

Benennung Description Dnomination Typ/ab Type/from Type/ a partir de

Mjfcifss!

Datum Edition Date


PR 752 F/N xxx- 20025599

01 03 Adjustment Checklist Blatt


Page 3.5.50.01
Feuille
Test. Test Space During test After adjustment / repair Remarks
No. No.
Diesel engine running
8. Alternator 8 overv. o.k. underv. overv. o.k. underv. Diesel engine approx. 1500 RPM / test for 10 sec.
9. RPM sensor A low o.k. high low o.k. high must be green from nmin up to nmax
Diesel engine
10. RPM A min: max: min: max: min: 800 RPM
+50

Diesel engine +60


...............- RPM -................. ...............- RPM -................. max: 1900 RPM
11. Potentiometer 3 {max.-......RPM good {max.-......RPM good
+20
should be green at nmax -30 RPM and
nominal RPM {min.+......RPM defect {min.+......RPM defect
+20
nmin +30 RPM / = indication at part. range
12. Overspeeding pro- A Function available: yes Function available: yes press button RPM drop at engine
tection / D-engine no no working hydraulic - HD = max.
13. Brake release 14 Light at on Light at on
must be functioning for all remaining tests
panel: off panel: off
Tracks running machine must be raised off the ground
14. RPM sensor 13 right right = no Indication/
travel gear left left must be ok for further tests
Disconnect servo lines from pump-connection X to travel motor - see instructions
15.1. basic adjustment 14 forward 2 forward 2 Pump regulating range forward
left track
forward 3 forward 3 Pump end of regulation forward
reverse 2 reverse 2 Pump regulating range reverse
reverse 3 reverse 3 Pump end of regulation reverse
16.1 Straight run 14 Test" "Adjust Adjust note position of rotary switch
compare track right
forward 1 yes no forward 1 yes no travel begin forward - tracks starts to turn
to track left
forward 2 forward 2 Pump regulating range forward
forward 3 forward 3 Pump end of regulation forward
reverse 1 yes no reverse 1 yes no travel begin reverse - tracks starts to turn
reverse 2 reverse 2 Pump regulating range reverse
reverse 3 reverse 3 Pump end of regulation reverse
Servo lines from pump-connection X connected to one travel motor on each side - see instruction
15.2 Basic adjustment 14 forward 4 forward 4 left motor regulating range forward
left track
reverse 4 reverse 4 control test
16.2 Straight run 14 forward 4 forward 4 right motor regulating range forward
right track
reverse 4 reverse 4 control test
Servo lines from pump-connection X connected to all travel motors - see instruction
15.3 basic adjustment 14 forward 4 forward 4 left motor regulating range forward
left track
forward 5 forward 5 left motor - mech. end stop - Qmin
reverse 4 reverse 4 control test - values are resulting from previous
reverse 5 reverse 5 adjustments
16.3 Straight run 14 forward 4 forward 4 right motor regulating range forward
compare track right forward 5 forward 5 right motor - mech. end stop - Qmin
to track left reverse 4 reverse 4 control test - values are resulting from previous
reverse 5 reverse 5 adjustments
Special tests - travel operation throttle lever must be at max. RPM position
17. current supply (440 )
20
2 mA initial current jump
max. mA 2-ranges 3-ranges
1350+ mA 1350+ mA (Switch pos. III)
70 70
17.1 Diesel engine in normal speed range
+50
1170+ mA (Switch pos. II)
50
not running max. mA 950 mA
in reduced speed range
870+ mA
50
max. mA -- (Switch pos. I)
in reduced speed range
(1180 )
80
mA reduced value when steering left (